Canon PowerShot SX720 HS camera Camera User Guide

Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Camera User Guide
Other Shooting Modes
ENGLISH
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Playback Mode
●● Make sure you read this guide, including the “Safety Precautions”
(= 14) section, before using the camera.
●● Reading this guide will help you learn to use the camera properly.
●● Store this guide safely so that you can use it in the future.
Wi-Fi Functions
●● Click the buttons in the lower right to access other pages.
: Next page
Setting Menu
: Previous page
Accessories
: Page before you clicked a link
●● To jump to the beginning of a chapter, click the chapter title at right.
Appendix
Index
© CANON INC. 2016
CT0-D086-000-F101-A
1
Before Use
Compatible Memory Cards
The following memory cards (commercially available) can be used,
regardless of capacity.
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
●● SD memory cards*1
Initial Information
●● SDHC memory cards*1*2
Camera Basics
●● SDXC memory cards* *
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
1 2
Package Contents
Before use, make sure the following items are included in the package.
If anything is missing, contact your camera retailer.
Other Shooting Modes
*1 Cards conforming to SD standards. However, not all memory cards have been
verified to work with the camera.
*2 UHS-I memory cards are also supported.
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Camera
Battery Pack
NB-13L*
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Battery Charger
CB-2LH/CB-2LHE
Index
Wrist Strap
* Do not peel off the adhesive covering from a battery pack.
●● Printed matter is also included.
●● A memory card is not included (= 2).
2
Preliminary Notes and Legal
Information
●● Take and review some test shots initially to make sure the images
were recorded correctly. Please note that Canon Inc., its subsidiaries
and affiliates, and its distributors are not liable for any consequential
damages arising from any malfunction of a camera or accessory,
including memory cards, that result in the failure of an image to be
recorded or to be recorded in a way that is machine readable.
●● Images recorded by the camera shall be for personal use. Refrain
from unauthorized recording that infringes on copyright law, and note
that even for personal use, photography may contravene copyright
or other legal rights at some performances or exhibitions, or in some
commercial settings.
●● The camera warranty is valid only in the area of purchase. In case of
camera problems while abroad, return to the area of purchase before
contacting a Canon Customer Support Help Desk.
●● Although the screen (monitor) is produced under extremely highprecision manufacturing conditions and more than 99.99% of the
pixels meet design specifications, in rare cases some pixels may be
defective or may appear as red or black dots. This is not a malfunction.
This will not affect recorded images.
●● When the camera is used over an extended period, it may become
warm. This does not indicate damage.
Conventions in This Guide
●● In this guide, icons are used to represent the corresponding camera
buttons and dials on which they appear or which they resemble.
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
●● The following camera buttons and controls are represented by icons.
Numbers in parentheses indicate the numbers of corresponding
controls in “Part Names” (= 4).
[ ]Up button (12) on back
[ ] Left button (8) on back
[ ] Right button (13) on back
[ ]Down button (15) on back
[ ]Control dial (7) on back
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
●● Shooting modes and on-screen icons and text are indicated in
brackets.
●●
: Important information you should know
●●
: Notes and tips for expert camera use
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Playback Mode
●● = xx: Pages with related information (in this example, “xx” represents
a page number)
Wi-Fi Functions
●● Instructions in this guide apply to the camera under default settings.
Setting Menu
●● For convenience, all supported memory cards are simply referred to as
the “memory card”.
Accessories
●● The symbols “  Still Images” and “  Movies” below titles indicate
how the function is used—whether for still images or movies.
Appendix
Index
3
Before Use
Part Names
(4)
(5) (6) (7)
Basic Guide
(1)
(8) (9) (10)(11)
(2)
(3) (4)
Advanced Guide
(1)
(2)
Camera Basics
(5)
(3)
(6)
(11)
(7)
(8)
(12)
(13) (14)
(15)
Other Shooting Modes
(13)
(14)
(15)
(16)
(9)
(12)
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
(10)
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Playback Mode
(1)Microphone
(7)
(2)Lamp
(8)Flash
Power button
(N-Mark)*
(1)
Screen (Monitor)
(3)
(12)[ (Exposure compensation)] /
(Story Highlights)] /
[
Up button
DIGITAL terminal
(9)
(10)[ (Flash pop up)] switch
(4)HDMITM terminal
(Framing Assist – Seek)]
(11)[
button
(5)
(12) Serial number (Body number)
(7)
(13) Tripod socket
(14) Memory card/battery cover
(Manual
(8)[ (Macro)] / [
focus)] / Left button
(15) Strap mount
(9)Indicator
(5)
Movie button
(6)
Shutter button
* Used with NFC feature (= 113).
Mode dial
(6)[
(Playback)] button
Control dial
Wi-Fi Functions
(Wi-Fi)] button
(11)[
(4)
(telephoto)] /
(wide angle)]
(magnify)] /
(index)]
(Information)] button
(2)Speaker
(3)Lens
Zoom lever
Shooting: ‌[
[
Playback: ‌[
[
(10)[
Setting Menu
Accessories
(13)[ (Flash)] / Right button
Appendix
(14) FUNC./SET (Function/Set) button
(15)[ (Self-timer)] / [ (Single-image
erase)] / Down button
(16)[
Index
] button
●● Turning the control dial is one way to
choose setting items, switch images, and
perform other operations. Most of these
operations are also possible with the
[ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons.
4
Table of Contents
Before Use
Initial Information............................................................... 2
Package Contents..................................................................... 2
Compatible Memory Cards....................................................... 2
Preliminary Notes and Legal Information.................................. 3
Conventions in This Guide........................................................ 3
Part Names............................................................................... 4
Common Camera Operations................................................. 12
Safety Precautions.................................................................. 14
Basic Guide
Basic Operations............................................................. 17
Initial Preparations.................................................................. 17
Attaching the Strap.....................................................................17
Holding the Camera....................................................................17
Charging the Battery Pack..........................................................18
Inserting the Battery Pack and Your Memory Card
(Commercially Available)............................................................18
Removing the Battery Pack and Memory Card......................19
Setting the Date and Time..........................................................20
Changing the Date and Time..................................................20
Display Language.......................................................................21
Trying the Camera Out............................................................ 22
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics................................................................. 25
On/Off...................................................................................... 25
Power-Saving Features (Auto Power Down)..............................26
Power Saving in Shooting Mode............................................26
Power Saving in Playback Mode............................................26
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Shutter Button......................................................................... 26
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Shooting Modes...................................................................... 27
Other Shooting Modes
Shooting Display Options........................................................ 27
Using the FUNC. Menu........................................................... 28
P Mode
Using the Menu Screen........................................................... 29
On-Screen Keyboard.............................................................. 30
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Indicator Display...................................................................... 31
Playback Mode
Clock....................................................................................... 31
Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode....................................... 32
Wi-Fi Functions
Shooting with Camera-Determined Settings........................... 32
Shooting (Smart Auto)................................................................32
Shooting in Hybrid Auto Mode....................................................34
Digest Movie Playback...........................................................35
Still Images/Movies................................................................35
Still Images.............................................................................35
Movies....................................................................................35
Scene Icons................................................................................36
Continuous Shooting Scenes.................................................37
Image Stabilization Icons............................................................37
On-Screen Frames.....................................................................38
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Shooting (Smart Auto)................................................................22
Viewing.......................................................................................23
Erasing Images......................................................................24
5
Common, Convenient Features.............................................. 38
Zooming In Closer on Subjects (Digital Zoom)...........................38
Easily Reacquiring Subjects after Manual Zooming
(Framing Assist – Seek).............................................................39
Zooming Automatically According to the Movement of the
Subject (Auto Zoom)...................................................................40
Adjusting the Constant Face Display Size.............................41
Easily Reacquiring Subjects with Auto Zooming
(Seek Assist)...............................................................................41
Using the Self-Timer...................................................................42
Using the Self-Timer to Avoid Camera Shake........................42
Customizing the Self-Timer....................................................43
Continuous Shooting..................................................................43
Image Display during Playback..............................................44
Using Face ID......................................................................... 44
Personal Information..................................................................44
Registering Face ID Information.................................................45
Shooting.....................................................................................46
Checking and Editing Registered Information............................46
Overwriting and Adding Face Information..............................47
Erasing Registered Information..............................................48
Changing the IS Mode Settings..................................................52
Deactivating Image Stabilization............................................52
Recording Movies with Subjects at the Same Size Shown
before Recording........................................................................53
Customizing Camera Operation.............................................. 53
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
Other Shooting Modes..................................................... 56
P Mode
Brightness / Color Customization (Live View Control)............. 56
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Applying Effects Automatically (Creative Shot)....................... 57
Enjoying a Variety of Images from Each Shot............................57
Choosing Effects........................................................................57
Recording Movies with a Variety of Effects................................58
Creative Shot Movie Playback...............................................58
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Moving Subjects (Sports)........................................................ 58
Setting Menu
Specific Scenes....................................................................... 59
Accessories
Applying Special Effects.......................................................... 60
Changing the Aspect Ratio.........................................................49
Changing Image Resolution (Size).............................................49
Guidelines for Choosing Resolution Based on Paper Size
(for 4:3 Images)......................................................................49
Correcting Greenish Image Areas from Mercury Lamps............50
Changing Movie Image Quality..................................................50
Helpful Shooting Features....................................................... 51
Special Modes for Other Purposes......................................... 63
Displaying Grid Lines..................................................................51
Magnifying the Area in Focus.....................................................51
Deactivating Auto Level..............................................................52
Basic Guide
Deactivating the AF-Assist Beam...............................................53
Preventing the Red-Eye Reduction Lamp from Lighting Up.......54
Changing the Image Display Style after Shots...........................54
Changing the Image Display Period after Shots....................54
Changing the Screen Displayed after Shots..........................55
Shooting with a Fish-Eye Lens Effect (Fish-Eye Effect).............60
Shots Resembling Miniature Models (Miniature Effect)..............61
Playback Speed and Estimated Playback Time
(for One-Minute Clips)............................................................61
Shooting with a Toy Camera Effect (Toy Camera Effect)............62
Shooting with a Soft Focus Effect...............................................62
Shooting in Monochrome............................................................63
Image Customization Features............................................... 49
Before Use
Appendix
Index
Auto Shooting after Face Detection (Smart Shutter)..................63
Auto Shooting after Smile Detection (Smile)..........................63
Auto Shooting after Wink Detection (Wink Self-Timer)...........64
6
Auto Shooting after Detecting New Person
(Face Self-Timer)....................................................................65
Recording Various Movies....................................................... 66
Recording Movies in Standard Mode.........................................66
Recording Movies with Smoother Motion...............................66
Locking or Changing Image Brightness before Recording.....66
Disabling Auto Slow Shutter...................................................67
Correcting Severe Camera Shake.........................................67
Sound Settings...........................................................................67
Deactivating the Wind Filter...................................................67
Using the Attenuator...............................................................67
Recording Movies in Short Clip Mode........................................68
Playback Effects.....................................................................68
Recording iFrame Movies...........................................................69
P Mode.............................................................................. 70
Shooting in Program AE ([P] Mode)........................................ 70
Image Brightness (Exposure).................................................. 71
Digital Tele-Converter.................................................................77
Changing the AF Frame Mode...................................................77
Center.....................................................................................77
Face AiAF...............................................................................77
Choosing Subjects to Focus On (Tracking AF)......................78
Shooting with Servo AF..........................................................79
Changing the Focus Setting.......................................................79
Shooting with the AF Lock..........................................................80
Shooting Continuously as the Camera Keeps the Subject in
Focus..........................................................................................80
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Changing the Flash Mode..........................................................81
Auto........................................................................................81
On...........................................................................................81
Slow Synchro.........................................................................81
Off...........................................................................................81
Adjusting the Flash Exposure Compensation.............................82
Shooting with the FE Lock..........................................................82
Tv, Av, and M mode.......................................................... 84
Image Colors........................................................................... 73
Specific Shutter Speeds ([Tv] Mode)...................................... 84
Capturing Natural Colors (White Balance).................................73
Custom White Balance...........................................................73
Changing Image Color Tones (My Colors).................................74
Custom Color.........................................................................74
Specific Aperture Values ([Av] Mode)...................................... 85
Shooting Close-Ups (Macro)......................................................75
Shooting in Manual Focus Mode................................................75
Easily Identifying the Focus Area (MF Peaking).....................76
Basic Guide
Flash....................................................................................... 81
Adjusting Image Brightness (Exposure Compensation).............71
Locking Image Brightness / Exposure (AE Lock).......................71
Changing the Metering Method..................................................71
Changing the ISO Speed............................................................72
Correcting Image Brightness (i-Contrast)...................................72
Shooting Range and Focusing................................................ 75
Before Use
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Other Settings......................................................................... 83
Changing the Compression Ratio (Image Quality).....................83
Changing the IS Mode Settings..................................................83
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Specific Shutter Speeds and Aperture Values ([M] Mode)...... 85
Adjusting the Flash Output.........................................................86
Playback Mode................................................................. 87
Viewing.................................................................................... 87
Switching Display Modes............................................................88
Overexposure Warning (for Image Highlights).......................89
Histogram...............................................................................89
7
GPS Information Display........................................................89
Viewing Short Movies Recorded in Creative Shot Mode
(Creative Shot Movies)...............................................................89
Viewing Short Movies Created When Shooting Still Images
(Digest Movies)...........................................................................90
Viewing by Date......................................................................90
Checking People Detected in Face ID........................................90
Rotating Images.................................................................... 100
Using the Menu........................................................................100
Deactivating Auto Rotation.......................................................100
Tagging Images as Favorites................................................ 101
Using the Menu........................................................................101
Navigating through Images in an Index......................................91
Finding Images Matching Specified Conditions..........................91
Viewing Individual Images in a Group........................................92
Editing Face ID Information..................................................... 93
Editing Movies....................................................................... 105
Changing Names........................................................................93
Erasing Names...........................................................................93
Image Viewing Options........................................................... 94
Magnifying Images.....................................................................94
Viewing Slideshows....................................................................94
Changing Slideshow Settings.................................................95
Auto Playback of Related Images (Smart Shuffle).....................95
Protecting Images................................................................... 96
Using the Menu..........................................................................96
Choosing Images Individually.....................................................96
Selecting a Range......................................................................97
Protecting All Images at Once....................................................97
Clearing All Protection at Once..............................................97
Erasing Images....................................................................... 98
Erasing Multiple Images at Once................................................98
Choosing a Selection Method................................................98
Choosing Images Individually.................................................99
Selecting a Range..................................................................99
Specifying All Images at Once................................................99
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Editing Still Images................................................................ 102
Resizing Images.......................................................................102
Cropping...................................................................................102
Changing Image Color Tones (My Colors)...............................103
Correcting Image Brightness (i-Contrast).................................104
Correcting Red-Eye..................................................................104
Browsing and Filtering Images................................................ 91
Before Use
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Reducing File Sizes..................................................................106
Erasing Movie Chapters...........................................................107
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Playback Mode
Viewing Albums (Story Highlights)........................................ 108
Choosing Themes for Albums..............................................108
Adding Background Music to Albums.......................................109
Creating Your Own Albums....................................................... 110
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Combining Short Clips........................................................... 111
Accessories
Wi-Fi Functions.............................................................. 112
Available Wi-Fi Features........................................................112
Appendix
Sending Images to a Smartphone..........................................113
Sending Images to an NFC-Compatible Smartphone.............. 113
Connecting via NFC When Camera Is Off or in Shooting
Mode.................................................................................... 113
Connecting via NFC When Camera Is in Playback Mode.... 115
Adding a Smartphone.............................................................. 116
Using Another Access Point..................................................... 118
Previous Access Points............................................................ 118
Index
8
Saving Images to a Computer................................................119
Preparing to Register a Computer............................................ 119
Installing the Software.......................................................... 119
Configuring the Computer for a Wi-Fi Connection
(Windows Only)....................................................................120
Saving Images to a Connected Computer................................120
Confirming Access Point Compatibility.................................120
Using WPS-Compatible Access Points................................121
Connecting to Listed Access Points.....................................123
Previous Access Points........................................................124
Sending Images to a Registered Web Service...................... 124
Registering Web Services........................................................124
Registering CANON iMAGE GATEWAY...............................125
Registering Other Web Services..........................................126
Uploading Images to Web Services.........................................127
Printing Images Wirelessly from a Connected Printer........... 128
Sending Images to Another Camera..................................... 129
Image Sending Options......................................................... 131
Sending Multiple Images..........................................................131
Selecting a Range................................................................131
Sending Images Tagged as Favorites..................................131
Notes on Sending Images........................................................132
Choosing the Number of Recording Pixels (Image Size).........132
Adding Comments....................................................................132
Sending Images Automatically (Image Sync)........................ 133
Initial Preparations....................................................................133
Preparing the Camera..........................................................133
Preparing the Computer.......................................................134
Sending Images........................................................................134
Viewing Images Sent via Image Sync on Your
Smartphone..........................................................................135
Using a Smartphone to View Camera Images and Control
the Camera........................................................................... 135
Geotagging Images on the Camera.........................................135
Shooting Remotely...................................................................136
Editing or Erasing Wi-Fi Settings.......................................... 137
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Editing Connection Information................................................137
Changing a Device Nickname..............................................137
Erasing Connection Information...........................................137
Changing the Camera Nickname.............................................138
Returning the Wi-Fi Settings to Default....................................138
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
Setting Menu................................................................... 139
P Mode
Adjusting Basic Camera Functions....................................... 139
Silencing Camera Operations...................................................139
Adjusting the Volume................................................................139
Hiding Hints and Tips................................................................140
Date and Time..........................................................................140
World Clock..............................................................................140
Lens Retraction Timing.............................................................141
Using Eco Mode.......................................................................141
Power-Saving Adjustment........................................................141
Screen Brightness....................................................................142
Hiding the Start-Up Screen.......................................................142
Formatting Memory Cards........................................................142
Low-Level Formatting...........................................................143
File Numbering.........................................................................143
Date-Based Image Storage......................................................144
Metric / Non-Metric Display......................................................144
Checking Certification Logos....................................................144
Display Language.....................................................................144
Adjusting Other Settings...........................................................145
Restoring Default Camera Settings..........................................145
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
9
Accessories.................................................................... 146
System Map.......................................................................... 146
Optional Accessories............................................................. 147
Printing Images Added to the Print List (DPOF)...................158
Adding Images to a Photobook................................................158
Choosing a Selection Method..............................................158
Adding Images Individually...................................................158
Adding All Images to a Photobook.......................................159
Removing All Images from a Photobook..............................159
Before Use
Basic Guide
Power Supplies.........................................................................147
Other Accessories....................................................................148
Printers.....................................................................................148
Photo Storage...........................................................................148
Appendix......................................................................... 160
Using Optional Accessories.................................................. 148
Troubleshooting..................................................................... 160
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Playback on a TV.....................................................................148
Playback on a High-Definition TV.........................................148
On-Screen Messages........................................................... 164
Other Shooting Modes
Inserting and Charging the Battery Pack.............................. 149
Shooting (Information Display).................................................166
Battery Level........................................................................166
Playback (Detailed Information Display)...................................167
Summary of Movie Control Panel.........................................167
Using a Computer to Charge the Battery.............................150
Using the Software................................................................ 151
Computer Connections via a Cable..........................................151
Checking Your Computer Environment................................151
Installing the Software..........................................................151
Saving Images to a Computer..................................................151
Printing Images..................................................................... 153
Easy Print.................................................................................153
Configuring Print Settings.........................................................154
Cropping Images before Printing..........................................154
Choosing Paper Size and Layout before Printing................155
Available Layout Options......................................................155
Printing ID Photos................................................................155
Printing Movie Scenes..............................................................156
Movie Printing Options.........................................................156
Adding Images to the Print List (DPOF)...................................156
Configuring Print Settings.....................................................156
Setting Up Printing for Individual Images.............................157
Setting Up Printing for a Range of Images...........................157
Setting Up Printing for All Images.........................................157
Clearing All Images from the Print List.................................158
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
On-Screen Information.......................................................... 166
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Playback Mode
Functions and Menu Tables.................................................. 168
Functions Available in Each Shooting Mode............................168
FUNC. Menu.............................................................................169
Shooting Tab.............................................................................171
Set Up Tab................................................................................175
Playback Tab............................................................................175
Print Tab...................................................................................176
Playback Mode FUNC. Menu...................................................176
Handling Precautions............................................................ 176
Specifications........................................................................ 177
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Camera.....................................................................................177
Number of Shots/Recording Time, Playback Time...............178
Shooting Range....................................................................178
Number of Shots per Memory Card.....................................179
Recording Time per Memory Card.......................................179
Battery Pack NB-13L............................................................180
Battery Charger CB-2LH/CB-2LHE......................................180
10
Compact Power Adapter CA-DC30/CA-DC30E...................180
Index..................................................................................... 181
Wi-Fi (Wireless LAN) Precautions......................................... 183
Radio Wave Interference Precautions......................................183
Security Precautions.................................................................183
Trademarks and Licensing...................................................184
Disclaimer.............................................................................185
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
11
Applying special effects
Common Camera Operations
Before Use
Basic Guide
Shoot
●● Use camera-determined settings (Auto Mode, Hybrid Auto Mode)
-- = 32, = 34
●● See several effects applied to each shot, using camera-determined
settings (Creative Shot Mode)
-- = 57
Vivid Colors
(= 60)
Poster Effect
(= 60)
Fish-Eye Effect
(= 60)
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Miniature Effect
(= 61)
Toy Camera Effect
(= 62)
Soft Focus
(= 62)
Other Shooting Modes
Shooting people well
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Monochrome
(= 63)
Portraits
(= 59)
Night Scenes
(= 59)
Wi-Fi Functions
●● Focus on faces
-- = 32, = 59, = 77
Matching specific scenes
Sports
(= 58)
Playback Mode
Setting Menu
●● Without using the flash (Flash Off)
-- = 32
Low Light
(= 59)
Fireworks
(= 59)
Accessories
●● Include yourself in the shot (Self-Timer)
-- = 42, = 65
●● Movie clips and photos together (Movie Digest)
-- = 34
Appendix
Index
12
View
●● View images (Playback Mode)
-- = 87
●● Automatic playback (Slideshow)
-- = 94
●● On a TV
-- = 148
●● On a computer
-- = 151
●● Browse through images quickly
-- = 91
●● Erase images
-- = 98
Save
●● Save images to a computer
-- = 151
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Use Wi-Fi Functions
Camera Basics
●● Send images to a smartphone
-- = 113
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
●● Share images online
-- = 124
Other Shooting Modes
●● Send images to a computer
-- = 133
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M Mode
●● Create an album automatically
-- = 108
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Record/View Movies
Setting Menu
●● Record movies
-- = 32, = 66
Accessories
●● View movies (Playback Mode)
-- = 87
Print
Appendix
Index
●● Print pictures
-- = 153
13
Safety Precautions
●● Before using the product, ensure that you read the safety precautions
described below. Always ensure that the product is used correctly.
●● The safety precautions noted here are intended to prevent you and
other persons from being injured or incurring property damage.
●● Be sure to also check the guides included with any separately sold
accessories you use.
Warning
Denotes the possibility of serious injury or death.
●● Do not trigger the flash in close proximity to people’s eyes.
Exposure to the intense light produced by the flash could damage
eyesight. In particular, remain at least 1 meter (3.3 feet) away from infants
when using the flash.
●● Store this equipment out of the reach of children and infants.
A strap wound around a child’s neck may result in asphyxiation.
If your product uses a power cord, mistakenly winding the cord around a
child’s neck may result in asphyxiation.
●● Use only recommended power sources.
●● Do not disassemble, alter, or apply heat to the product.
●● Do not peel off the adhesive covering, if the battery pack has it.
●● Avoid dropping or subjecting the product to severe impacts.
●● Do not touch the interior of the product if it is broken, such as when
dropped.
●● Stop using the product immediately if it emits smoke or a strange
smell, or otherwise behaves abnormally.
●● Do not use organic solvents such as alcohol, benzine, or thinner to
clean the product.
●● Avoid contact with liquid, and do not allow liquid or foreign objects
inside.
This could result in electrical shock or fire.
If the product gets wet, or if liquid or foreign objects get inside, remove the
battery pack/batteries or unplug immediately.
●● If your model has a viewfinder or interchangeable lens, do not look
through the viewfinder or lens at bright light sources (such as the sun
on a clear day, or a bright artificial light source).
This may damage your eyesight.
Before Use
●● When using products with interchangeable lenses, do not leave the
camera with a lens attached or a lens itself out in direct sunlight
without the lens cap on.
This may cause a fire to start.
Advanced Guide
Basic Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
●● Do not touch the product during thunderstorms if it is plugged in.
This could result in electrical shock or fire. Immediately stop using the
product and distance yourself from it.
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
●● Use only the recommended battery pack/batteries.
●● Do not place the battery pack/batteries near or in direct flame.
This may cause the battery pack/batteries to explode or leak, resulting in
electrical shock, fire, or injuries. If leaking battery electrolyte comes into
contact with eyes, mouth, skin, or clothing, immediately flush with water.
●● If the product uses a battery charger, note the following precautions.
-- Remove the plug periodically and, using a dry cloth, wipe away any
dust and dirt that has collected on the plug, the exterior of the power
outlet, and the surrounding area.
-- Do not insert or remove the plug with wet hands.
-- Do not use the equipment in a manner that exceeds the rated
capacity of the electrical outlet or wiring accessories. Do not use if
the plug is damaged or not fully inserted in the outlet.
-- Do not allow dust or metal objects (such as pins or keys) to contact
the terminals or plug.
-- Do not cut, damage, alter, or place heavy items on the power cord, if
your product uses one.
This could result in electrical shock or fire.
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
●● Turn the camera off in places where camera use is prohibited.
The electromagnetic waves emitted by the camera may interfere with the
operation of electronic instruments and other devices. Exercise adequate
caution when using the product in places where use of electronic devices
is restricted, such as inside airplanes and medical facilities.
14
●● Do not allow the camera to maintain contact with skin for extended
periods.
Even if the camera does not feel hot, this may cause low-temperature
burns, manifested in redness of the skin or blistering. Use a tripod in hot
places, or if you have poor circulation or insensitive skin.
Caution
Denotes the possibility of injury.
●● When carrying the product by the strap, be careful not to bang it, subject
it to strong impacts or shocks, or let it get caught on other objects.
●● Be careful not to bump or push strongly on the lens.
This could lead to injury or damage the camera.
●● Be careful not to subject the screen to strong impacts.
If the screen cracks, injury may result from the broken fragments.
●● When using the flash, be careful not to cover it with your fingers or
clothing.
This could result in burns or damage to the flash.
●● Avoid using, placing, or storing the product in the following places:
-- Places subject to direct sunlight
-- Places subject to temperatures above 40 °C (104 °F)
-- Humid or dusty places
These could cause leakage, overheating, or an explosion of the battery
pack/batteries, resulting in electrical shock, fire, burns, or other injuries.
Overheating and damage may result in electrical shock, fire, burns, or
other injuries.
●● The slideshow transition effects may cause discomfort when viewed
for prolonged periods.
●● When using optional lenses, lens filters, or filter adapters (if
applicable), be sure to attach these accessories firmly.
If the lens accessory becomes loose and falls off, it may crack, and the
shards of glass may lead to cuts.
Caution
Denotes the possibility of property damage.
●● Do not aim the camera at intense light sources, such as the sun on a
clear day or an intense artificial light source.
Doing so may damage the image sensor or other internal components.
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
●● When using the camera on a sandy beach or at a windy location, be
careful not to allow dust or sand to enter the camera.
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
●● On products that raise and lower the flash automatically, do not push
the flash down or pry it open.
This may cause the product to malfunction.
Other Shooting Modes
●● Wipe off any dust, grime, or other foreign matter on the flash with a
cotton swab or cloth.
The heat emitted from the flash may cause foreign matter to smoke or the
product to malfunction.
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M Mode
●● Remove and store the battery pack/batteries when you are not using
the product.
Any battery leakage that occurs may cause product damage.
Playback Mode
●● Before you discard the battery pack/batteries, cover the terminals with
tape or other insulators.
Contacting other metal materials may lead to fire or explosions.
Setting Menu
●● Unplug any battery charger used with the product when not in use. Do
not cover with a cloth or other objects when in use.
Leaving the unit plugged in for a long period of time may cause it to
overheat and distort, resulting in fire.
Wi-Fi Functions
Accessories
Appendix
Index
●● Do not leave any dedicated battery packs near pets.
Pets biting the battery pack could cause leakage, overheating, or
explosion, resulting in product damage or fire.
●● On products that raise and lower the flash automatically, make sure to
avoid pinching your fingers with the lowering flash.
This could result in injury.
15
●● If your product uses multiple batteries, do not use batteries that
have different levels of charge together, and do not use old and
new batteries together. Do not insert the batteries with the + and –
terminals reversed.
This may cause the product to malfunction.
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
●● Do not sit down with the camera in your pant pocket.
Doing so may cause malfunctions or damage the screen.
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
●● When putting the camera in your bag, ensure that hard objects do not
come into contact with the screen. Also close the screen (so that it
faces the body), if your product’s screen closes.
Other Shooting Modes
●● Do not attach any hard objects to the product.
Doing so may cause malfunctions or damage the screen.
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
16
Basic Guide
Initial Preparations
Prepare for shooting as follows.
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Attaching the Strap
Basic Operations
Basic information and instructions, from initial preparations to shooting
and playback
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
●● Thread the end of the strap through the
strap mount (1), and then pull the other
end of the strap through the loop on the
threaded end (2).
(2)
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M Mode
(1)
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Holding the Camera
Accessories
●● Place the strap around your wrist.
●● When shooting, keep your arms close to
your body and hold the camera securely
to prevent it from moving. If you have
raised the flash, do not rest your fingers
on it.
Appendix
Index
17
Charging the Battery Pack
Before use, charge the battery pack with the included charger. Be sure to
charge the battery pack initially, because the camera is not sold with the
battery pack charged.
1 Insert the battery pack.
(1)
(2)
(2)
(1)
CB-2LH
●● After aligning the
marks on the battery
pack and charger, insert the battery pack
by pushing it in (1) and down (2).
2 Charge the battery pack.
●● CB-2LH: Flip out the plug (1) and plug the
charger into a power outlet (2).
●● CB-2LHE: Plug the power cord into the
charger, then plug the other end into a
power outlet.
●● The charging lamp turns orange, and
charging begins.
CB-2LHE
●● When charging is finished, the lamp turns
green.
3 Remove the battery pack.
(1)
(2)
●● After unplugging the battery charger,
remove the battery pack by pushing it in
(1) and up (2).
●● For details on charging time and the number of shots and
recording time possible with a fully charged battery pack, see
“Number of Shots/Recording Time, Playback Time” (= 178).
●● Charged battery packs gradually lose their charge, even when
they are not used. Charge the battery pack on (or immediately
before) the day of use.
●● The charger can be used in areas with 100 – 240 V AC power
(50/60 Hz). For power outlets in a different format, use a commercially
available adapter for the plug. Never use an electrical transformer
designed for traveling, which may damage the battery pack.
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
Inserting the Battery Pack and Your Memory Card
(Commercially Available)
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Insert the included battery pack and a memory card (commercially
available).
Note that before using a memory card that is new or has been formatted
in another device, you should format the memory card with this camera
(= 142).
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
1 Open the cover.
(1)
Setting Menu
●● Slide the switch (1) and open the cover (2).
Accessories
Appendix
(2)
Index
●● To protect the battery pack and keep it in optimal condition, do not
charge it continuously for more than 24 hours.
●● For battery chargers that use a power cord, do not attach
the charger or cord to other objects. Doing so could result in
malfunction or damage to the product.
18
2 Insert the battery pack.
(1)
(2)
(1)
●● Holding the battery pack with the terminals
in the position shown, hold the battery
lock toward (1) and insert the battery pack
toward (2) until the lock clicks shut.
●● If you insert the battery pack facing the
wrong way, it cannot be locked into the
correct position. Always confirm that the
battery pack is facing the right way and
locks when inserted.
3 Check your card’s write-protect
switch and insert the memory card.
●● Recording is not possible on memory
cards with a write-protect switch when the
switch is in the locked position. Move the
switch toward (1).
(2)
●● Insert the memory card with the label (2)
facing as shown until it clicks into place.
●● Make sure the memory card is facing the
right way when you insert it. Inserting
memory cards facing the wrong way may
damage the camera.
●● For guidelines on how many shots or hours of recording can be
saved on one memory card, see “Number of Shots per Memory
Card” (= 179).
Removing the Battery Pack and Memory Card
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Remove the battery pack.
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
●● Open the cover and press the battery
lock in the direction of the arrow.
Other Shooting Modes
●● The battery pack will pop up.
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Remove the memory card.
●● Push the memory card in until it clicks,
and then slowly release it.
Playback Mode
●● The memory card will pop up.
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
4 Close the cover.
●● Lower the cover (1) and hold it down as
you slide the switch, until it clicks into the
closed position (2).
(2)
Appendix
Index
(1)
19
Setting the Date and Time
Set the current date and time correctly as follows if the [Date/Time] screen
is displayed when you turn the camera on. Information you specify this
way is recorded in image properties when you shoot, and it is used when
you manage images by shooting date or print images showing the date.
1 Turn the camera on.
●● Unless you set the date, time, and home time zone, the [Date/
Time] screen will be displayed each time you turn the camera on.
Specify the correct information.
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
●● To set daylight saving time (1 hour ahead), choose [ ] in step 2
and then choose [ ] by pressing the [ ][ ] buttons or turning
the [ ] dial.
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
●● Press the power button.
●● The [Date/Time] screen is displayed.
Changing the Date and Time
2 Set the date and time.
●● Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [
dial to specify the date and time.
P Mode
1 Access the menu screen.
●● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose an
option.
●● When finished, press the [
Other Shooting Modes
Adjust the date and time as follows.
]
] button.
●● Press the [
Tv, Av, and M Mode
] button.
Playback Mode
2 Choose [Date/Time].
Wi-Fi Functions
●● Move the zoom lever to choose the
[ ] tab.
3 Specify your home time zone.
●● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose your
home time zone.
4 Finish the setup process.
●● Press the [ ] button when finished.
After a confirmation message, the setting
screen is no longer displayed.
Setting Menu
●● Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the
[ ] dial to choose [Date/Time], and then
press the [ ] button.
3
Change the date and time.
●● Follow step 2 in “Setting the Date and
Time” (= 20) to adjust the settings.
●● Press the [
menu screen.
Accessories
Appendix
Index
] button to close the
●● To turn off the camera, press the power
button.
20
●● The camera has a built-in date/time battery (backup battery).
Date/time settings can be retained for about 3 weeks after the
battery pack is removed.
●● The date/time battery will be charged in about 4 hours once you
insert a charged battery pack even if the camera is left off.
●● Once the date/time battery is depleted, the [Date/Time] screen will
be displayed when you turn the camera on. Set the correct date
and time as described in “Setting the Date and Time” (= 20).
●● The current time is displayed if you wait too long in step 2 after
] button.
pressing the [ ] button before you press the [
In this case, press the [ ] button to dismiss the time display and
repeat step 2.
●● You can also change the display language by pressing the
] button and choosing [Language
] on the [ ] tab.
[
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
Display Language
P Mode
Change the display language as needed.
1 Enter Playback mode.
●● Press the [
Tv, Av, and M Mode
] button.
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
2 Access the setting screen.
Setting Menu
●● Press and hold the [ ] button, and then
immediately press the [
] button.
Accessories
3 Set the display language.
●● Press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons or turn
the [ ] dial to choose a language, and
then press the [ ] button.
Appendix
Index
●● Once the display language has been set,
the setting screen is no longer displayed.
21
Trying the Camera Out
 Still Images  Movies
Follow these instructions to turn the camera on, shoot still images or
movies, and then view them.
Shooting (Smart Auto)
Shoot.
Shooting Still Images
4
Before Use
1)Focus.
Basic Guide
●● Press the shutter button lightly, halfway
down. The camera beeps twice after
focusing, and frames are displayed to
indicate image areas in focus.
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
For fully automatic selection of the optimal settings for specific scenes,
simply let the camera determine the subject and shooting conditions.
Other Shooting Modes
1 Turn the camera on.
P Mode
●● Press the power button.
●● The startup screen is displayed.
2 Enter [
] mode.
●● Set the mode dial to [
].
●● Aim the camera at the subject. The
camera will make a slight clicking noise
as it determines the scene.
●● Icons representing the scene and image
stabilization mode are displayed in the
upper left of the screen.
●● Frames displayed around any detected
subjects indicate that they are in focus.
3 Compose the shot.
●● To zoom in and enlarge the subject, move
the zoom lever toward [ ] (telephoto),
and to zoom away from the subject, move
it toward [ ] (wide angle).
Tv, Av, and M Mode
●● If [Raise the flash] is displayed, move
the [ ] switch to raise the flash. It will fire
when shooting. If you prefer not to use
the flash, push it down with your finger,
into the camera.
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
2)Shoot.
Accessories
●● Press the shutter button all the way
down.
●● As the camera shoots, a shutter sound
is played, and in low-light conditions
when you have raised the flash, it fires
automatically.
Appendix
Index
●● Keep the camera still until the shutter
sound ends.
●● After displaying your shot, the camera will
revert to the shooting screen.
22
Recording Movies
1) Start recording.
(1)
●● Press the movie button. The camera
beeps once as recording begins, and
[ Rec] is displayed with the elapsed
time (1).
●● Black bars are displayed on the top and
bottom edges of the screen, and the
subject is slightly enlarged. The black
bars indicate image areas not recorded.
●● Frames displayed around any detected
faces indicate that they are in focus.
●● Once recording begins, take your finger
off the movie button.
2) Finish recording.
●● Press the movie button again to stop
recording. The camera beeps twice as
recording stops.
Before Use
Viewing
After shooting images or movies, you can view them on the screen as
follows.
1
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Enter Playback mode.
●● Press the [
Camera Basics
] button.
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
●● Your last shot is displayed.
2 Choose an image.
Other Shooting Modes
●● To view the previous image, press
the [ ] button or turn the [ ] dial
counterclockwise. To view the next
image, press the [ ] button or turn the
[ ] dial clockwise.
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Playback Mode
●● Press and hold the [ ][ ] buttons to
browse through images quickly.
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
●● To access this screen (Scroll Display
mode), turn the [ ] dial rapidly. In this
mode, turn the [ ] dial to browse through
images.
●● To return to single-image display, press
the [ ] button.
●● Movies are identified by a [
To play movies, go to step 3.
Accessories
Appendix
Index
] icon.
23
3 Play movies.
Erasing Images
●● Press the [ ] button, choose [ ] (either
press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the
[ ] dial), and then press the [ ] button
again.
●● Playback now begins, and after the movie
] is displayed.
is finished, [
●● To adjust the volume, press the [
buttons during playback.
●● To switch to Shooting mode from Playback mode, press the
shutter button halfway.
][
]
Before Use
You can choose and erase unneeded images one by one. Note that
erased images cannot be recovered. Be sure that you want to erase
images before using this option.
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1 Choose an image to erase.
●● Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [
dial to choose an image.
Camera Basics
]
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
2 Erase the image.
●● Press the [
Other Shooting Modes
] button.
●● After [Erase?] is displayed, press the
[ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial to
choose [Erase], and then press the [ ]
button.
P Mode
●● The current image is now erased.
Playback Mode
●● To cancel erasure, press the [ ][ ]
buttons or turn the [ ] dial to choose
[Cancel], and then press the [ ] button.
Wi-Fi Functions
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Setting Menu
●● You can choose multiple images to erase at once (= 98).
Accessories
Appendix
Index
24
Advanced Guide
Before Use
On/Off
Basic Guide
Shooting Mode
Advanced Guide
●● Press the power button to turn the
camera on and prepare for shooting.
Camera Basics
Other basic operations and more ways to enjoy your camera, including
shooting and playback options
Camera Basics
●● To turn the camera off, press the power
button again.
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Playback Mode
Other Shooting Modes
●● Press the [
] button to turn the camera
on and view your shots.
●● To turn the camera off, press the [
button again.
P Mode
]
Tv, Av, and M Mode
●● To switch to Playback mode from Shooting mode, press the
] button.
[
●● To switch to Shooting mode from Playback mode, press the
shutter button halfway (= 26).
●● The lens will be retracted after about one minute once the camera
is in Playback mode. You can turn the camera off when the lens is
] button.
retracted by pressing the [
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
25
Power-Saving Features (Auto Power Down)
As a way to conserve battery power, the camera automatically deactivates
the screen (Display Off) and then turns itself off after a specific period of
inactivity.
Power Saving in Shooting Mode
The screen is automatically deactivated after about one minute of
inactivity. In about two more minutes, the lens is retracted and the camera
turns itself off. To activate the screen and prepare for shooting when
the screen is off but the lens is still out, press the shutter button halfway
(= 26).
Power Saving in Playback Mode
The camera turns itself off automatically after about five minutes of
inactivity.
●● You can deactivate Auto Power Down and adjust the timing of
Display Off, if you prefer (= 141).
●● Power saving is not active while the camera is connected to other
devices via Wi-Fi (= 112), or when connected to a computer
(= 151).
Before Use
Shutter Button
To ensure your shots are in focus, always begin by holding the shutter
button halfway down, and once the subject is in focus, press the button all
the way down to shoot.
In this manual, shutter button operations are described as pressing the
button halfway or all the way down.
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
1 Press halfway. (Press lightly to
focus.)
Other Shooting Modes
●● Press the shutter button halfway. The
camera beeps twice, and frames are
displayed around image areas in focus.
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M Mode
2 Press all the way down. (From the
halfway position, press fully to
shoot.)
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
●● The camera shoots, as a shutter sound
is played.
Setting Menu
●● Keep the camera still until the shutter
sound ends.
●● Images may be out of focus if you shoot without initially pressing
the shutter button halfway.
●● Length of shutter sound playback varies depending on the time
required for the shot. It may take longer in some shooting scenes,
and images will be blurry if you move the camera (or the subject
moves) before the shutter sound ends.
Accessories
Appendix
Index
26
Shooting Modes
Shooting Display Options
Use the mode dial to access each shooting mode.
(7)
(1)
(2)
Advanced Guide
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Information Display
(4)
(5)
(1)
Live View Control Mode
Customize image brightness or
colors when shooting (= 56).
(2)
Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode
Fully automatic shooting, with
camera-determined settings
(= 22, = 32, = 34).
(4)
Basic Guide
Camera Basics
(3)
(3)
Press the [
] button to view other information on the screen, or to
hide the information. For details on the information displayed, see “OnScreen Information” (= 166).
Before Use
Creative Shot Mode
You can capture multiple images
with effects using cameradetermined settings (= 57).
Sports Mode
Shoot continuously as the camera
focuses on moving subjects
(= 58).
Other Shooting Modes
(6)
(5)
Special Scene Mode
Shoot with settings designed for
specific scenes, or add a variety of
effects (= 59).
(6)
Movie Mode
For shooting movies (= 66).
You can also shoot movies when
the mode dial is not set to Movie
mode, simply by pressing the
movie button.
(7)
P, Tv, Av, and M Modes
Take a variety of shots using
your preferred settings (= 70,
= 84).
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Playback Mode
No Information Display
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
●● Screen brightness is automatically increased by the night view
function when you are shooting under low light, making it easier
to check how shots are composed. However, on-screen image
brightness may not match the brightness of your shots. Note that
any on-screen image distortion or jerky subject motion will not
affect recorded images.
●● For playback display options, see “Switching Display Modes”
(= 88).
Accessories
Appendix
Index
27
4 Finish the setup process.
Using the FUNC. Menu
●● Press the [
Configure commonly used shooting functions through the FUNC. menu as
follows.
Note that menu items and options vary depending on the shooting mode
(= 169).
1
Access the FUNC. menu.
●● Press the [
] button.
●● The screen before you pressed the
[ ] button in step 1 is displayed again,
showing the option you configured.
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
●● To undo any accidental setting changes, you can restore the
camera’s default settings (= 145).
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
] button.
Other Shooting Modes
2 Choose a menu item.
P Mode
●● Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose a menu item (1), and then
press the [ ] or [ ] button.
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Playback Mode
●● Available options (2) are listed next to
menu items, on the right.
(1) (2)
Wi-Fi Functions
●● Depending on the menu item, functions
can be specified simply by pressing the
[ ] or [ ] button, or another screen is
displayed for configuring the function.
Setting Menu
Accessories
3 Choose an option.
●● Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [
dial to choose an option.
] icon can
●● Items labeled with a [
be configured by pressing the [
]
button.
Appendix
]
Index
●● To return to the menu items, press the
[ ] button.
28
4 Choose an option.
Using the Menu Screen
●● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose an
option.
Configure a variety of camera functions through the menu screen as
follows. Menu items are grouped by purpose on tabs, such as shooting
[ ], playback [
], and so on. Note that available menu items vary
depending on the selected shooting or playback mode (= 171 – = 175).
1
5 Finish the setup process.
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
●● Press the [
] button to return to the
screen displayed before you pressed the
[
] button in step 1.
Access the menu screen.
●● Press the [
Before Use
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
] button.
Other Shooting Modes
2 Choose a tab.
P Mode
●● To undo any accidental setting changes, you can restore the
camera’s default settings (= 145).
●● Move the zoom lever to choose a tab.
Tv, Av, and M Mode
●● After you have pressed the [ ][ ]
buttons or turned the [ ] dial to choose a
tab initially, you can switch between tabs
by pressing the [ ][ ] buttons.
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
3 Choose a menu item.
●● Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [
dial to choose a menu item.
Appendix
]
Index
●● For menu items with options not shown,
first press the [ ] or [ ] button to switch
screens, and then either press the [ ][ ]
buttons or turn the [ ] dial to select the
menu item.
●● To return to the previous screen, press
] button.
the [
29
Confirming Input and Returning to the
Previous Screen
On-Screen Keyboard
Use the on-screen keyboard to enter information for Face ID (= 44),
Wi-Fi connections (= 121), and so on. Note that the length and type of
information you can enter varies depending on the function you are using.
(1)
●● Press the [
] button.
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Entering Characters
●● Press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons or turn
the [ ] dial to choose a character, and
then press the [ ] button to enter it.
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
●● The amount of information you can enter
(1) varies depending on the function you
are using.
P Mode
Moving the Cursor
●● Choose [
button.
] or [
Tv, Av, and M Mode
] and press the [
]
Playback Mode
Entering Line Breaks
●● Choose [
] and press the [
Wi-Fi Functions
] button.
Setting Menu
Switching Input Modes
●● To switch to numbers or symbols, choose
[ ] and press the [ ] button.
●● To switch between uppercase and
lowercase letters, choose [ ] and press
the [ ] button.
●● Available input modes vary depending on
the function you are using.
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Deleting Characters
●● Choose [
] and press the [ ] button.
The previous character will be deleted.
] and holding down the [ ]
●● Choosing [
button will erase five characters at a time.
30
Indicator Display
The indicator on the back of the camera (= 4) lights up or blinks
depending on the camera status.
Color
Green
Orange
Indicator
Status
Blinking
On
Camera Status
Starting up, recording/reading/transmitting
images, shooting long exposures (= 84,
= 85), connected to a computer (= 151),
connecting/transmitting via Wi-Fi, or display
off (= 26, = 141, = 141)
Charging via USB
Before Use
Clock
Basic Guide
You can check the current time.
●● Press and hold the [
] button.
Advanced Guide
●● The current time appears.
Camera Basics
●● If you hold the camera vertically while
using the clock function, it will switch to
vertical display. Press the [ ][ ] buttons
or turn the [ ] dial to change the display
color.
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
●● Press the [ ] button again to cancel the
clock display.
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M Mode
●● When the indicator blinks green, never turn the camera off, open
the memory card/battery cover, or shake or jolt the camera. This
may corrupt images or damage the camera or memory card.
●● When the camera is off, press and hold the [
press the power button to display the clock.
Playback Mode
] button, then
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
31
Shooting with Camera-Determined
Settings
For fully automatic selection of the optimal settings for specific scenes,
simply let the camera determine the subject and shooting conditions.
Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Shooting (Smart Auto)
Convenient mode for easy shots with greater control over shooting
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
 Still Images  Movies
Other Shooting Modes
1 Turn the camera on.
P Mode
●● Press the power button.
Tv, Av, and M Mode
●● The startup screen is displayed.
2 Enter [
Playback Mode
] mode.
●● Set the mode dial to [
Wi-Fi Functions
].
●● Aim the camera at the subject. The
camera will make a slight clicking noise
as it determines the scene.
●● Icons representing the scene and image
stabilization mode are displayed in
the upper left of the screen (= 36,
= 37).
●● Frames displayed around any detected
subjects indicate that they are in focus.
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
32
3 Compose the shot.
(1)
(2)
2)Shoot.
●● To zoom in and enlarge the subject, move
the zoom lever toward [ ] (telephoto),
and to zoom away from the subject, move
it toward [ ] (wide angle). (A zoom bar (1)
showing the zoom position is displayed,
along with the range of focus (2).)
●● Press the shutter button all the way down.
●● As the camera shoots, a shutter sound
is played, and in low-light conditions
when you have raised the flash, it fires
automatically.
●● If [Raise the flash] is displayed, move
the [ ] switch to raise the flash. It will fire
when shooting. If you prefer not to use
the flash, push it down with your finger,
into the camera.
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
Recording Movies
4
●● Several frames are displayed when
multiple areas are in focus.
Advanced Guide
●● After displaying your shot, the camera will
revert to the shooting screen.
P Mode
1) Start recording.
Shoot.
Shooting Still Images
●● Press the shutter button halfway. The
camera beeps twice after focusing, and
frames are displayed to indicate image
areas in focus.
Basic Guide
●● Keep the camera still until the shutter
sound ends.
●● To zoom in or out quickly, move the zoom
lever all the way toward [ ] (telephoto)
or [ ] (wide angle), and to zoom in
or out slowly, move it just a little in the
desired direction.
1)Focus.
Before Use
(1)
●● Press the movie button. The camera
beeps once as recording begins, and
[ Rec] is displayed with the elapsed
time (1).
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Playback Mode
●● Black bars are displayed on the top and
bottom edges of the screen, and the
subject is slightly enlarged. The black
bars indicate image areas not recorded.
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
●● Frames displayed around any detected
faces indicate that they are in focus.
Accessories
●● Once recording begins, take your finger
off the movie button.
Appendix
2)Resize the subject and recompose
the shot as needed.
Index
●● To resize the subject, repeat the
operations in step 3.
However, note that the sound of camera
operations will be recorded. Note that
movies shot at zoom factors shown in
blue will look grainy.
●● When you recompose shots, the
focus, brightness, and colors will be
automatically adjusted.
33
3 Shoot.
3) Finish recording.
●● Press the movie button again to stop
recording. The camera beeps twice as
recording stops.
●● Recording will stop automatically when
the memory card becomes full.
●● The flash firing during shots indicates that the camera has
automatically attempted to ensure optimal colors in the main
subject and background (Multi-area White Balance).
Shooting in Hybrid Auto Mode
 Still Images  Movies
You can make a short movie of the day just by shooting still images. The
camera records 2 – 4-second clips of scenes before each shot, which are
later combined in a digest movie.
Clips recorded in this mode may be included in Story Highlights albums
(= 108).
1 Enter [
] mode.
●● Follow step 2 in “Shooting (Smart Auto)”
(= 32) and choose [ ].
2 Compose the shot.
●● Follow steps 3 – 4 in “Shooting (Smart
Auto)” (= 32) to compose the shot and
focus.
●● For more impressive digest movies,
aim the camera at subjects about four
seconds before shooting still images.
●● Follow step 4 in “Shooting (Smart Auto)”
(= 32) to shoot a still image.
●● The camera records both a still image
and movie clip. The clip, which ends with
the still image and a shutter sound, forms
a single chapter in the digest movie.
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
●● Battery life is shorter in this mode than in [
] mode, because
digest movies are recorded for each shot.
●● A digest movie may not be recorded if you shoot a still image
] mode, or
immediately after turning the camera on, choosing [
operating the camera in other ways.
●● Sounds and vibrations from operating the camera will be recorded
in digest movies.
●● Digest movie quality is [
] and cannot be changed.
●● Sounds are not played when you press the shutter button halfway
or trigger the self-timer (= 139).
●● Digest movies are saved as separate movie files in the following
] mode.
cases even if they were recorded on the same day in [
-- The digest movie file size reaches approximately 4 GB, or the
total recording time reaches approximately 16 minutes and
40 seconds.
-- The digest movie is protected (= 96).
-- Daylight saving time (= 20) or time zone (= 140) settings
are changed.
-- A new folder is created (= 144).
●● Recorded shutter sounds cannot be modified or erased.
●● If you prefer to record digest movies without still images, adjust
the setting in advance. Choose MENU (= 29) > [ ] tab >
[Digest Type] > [No Stills].
●● Individual chapters can be edited (= 107).
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
34
Digest Movie Playback
Display a still image shot in [ ] mode to play the digest movie created
on the same day, or specify the date of the digest movie to play (= 90).
Still Images/Movies
●● If the camera makes no operating sounds, it may have been
] button. To activate
turned on while holding down the [
] button and choose [Mute] on
sounds again, press the [
the [ ] tab, and then press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose [Off].
●● You can change how long images are displayed after shots
(= 54).
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Movies
Camera Basics
●● Keep your fingers away from the microphone (1) while recording
movies. Blocking the microphone may prevent audio from being
recorded or may cause the recording to sound muffled.
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
(1 )
Other Shooting Modes
Still Images
●● A blinking [ ] icon warns that images are more likely to be
blurred by camera shake. In this case, mount the camera on a
tripod or take other measures to keep it still.
●● If your shots are dark despite the flash firing, move closer to the
subject. For details on the flash range, see “Camera” (= 177).
●● The subject may be too close if the camera only beeps once
when you press the shutter button halfway. For details on the
range of focus (shooting range), see “Shooting Range” (= 178).
●● To reduce red-eye and to assist in focusing, the lamp may be lit
when shooting in low-light conditions.
●● A blinking [ ] icon displayed when you attempt to shoot
indicates that shooting is not possible until the flash has finished
recharging. Shooting can resume as soon as the flash is ready,
so either press the shutter button all the way down and wait, or
release it and press it again.
●● The shutter sound will not be played when the Sleeping and
Babies (Sleeping) icons (= 36) are displayed.
●● Although you can shoot again before the shooting screen
is displayed, your previous shot may determine the focus,
brightness, and colors used.
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M Mode
●● Avoid touching camera controls other than the movie button when
shooting movies, because sounds made by the camera will be
recorded.
●● Once movie recording begins, the image display area changes
and subjects are enlarged to allow for correction of significant
camera shake. To record subjects at the same size shown before
recording, follow the steps in “Recording Movies with Subjects at
the Same Size Shown before Recording” (= 53).
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
●● Audio is recorded in stereo.
Appendix
Index
35
●● The background color of [ ], [ ], [ ], [ ], and [
and the background color of [ ] is orange.
Scene Icons
 Still Images  Movies
In [ ] and [
] modes, shooting scenes determined by the camera
are indicated by the icon displayed, and corresponding settings are
automatically selected for optimal focusing, subject brightness, and color.
Depending on the scene, continuous images may be shot (= 37).
Background
Subject
Normal Backlit Dark*1 Sunsets Spotlights
–
People
*2
*3
Moving People
*3
–
–
–
Shadows on Face
*2
*3
–
–
–
–
*
3
Smiling
*
–
–
–
Sleeping
*2
*3
–
–
–
Babies
*3
*3
–
–
–
Smiling Babies
*
3
*3
–
–
–
Sleeping Babies
*2
*3
–
–
–
–
–
–
3
Moving Children
*3
*3
Other Subjects
*2
*3
Other Moving Subjects
*3
*3
–
–
Other Close-Range
Subjects
*2
*3
–
–
–
*1 Tripod used.
*2 The background color of icons is light blue when the background is a blue sky,
dark blue when the background is dark, and gray for all other backgrounds.
*3 The background color of icons is light blue when the background is a blue sky,
and gray for all other backgrounds.
] is dark blue,
Before Use
●● For movies, only People, Other Subjects, and Other Close-Range
Subjects icons are displayed.
Basic Guide
●● In [ ] mode, icons are only displayed for People, Shadows on Face,
Other Subjects, and Other Close-Range Subjects.
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
●● For self-timer shots, icons are not displayed for the following subjects:
moving, smiling, or sleeping people; smiling or sleeping babies;
moving children; and other moving subjects.
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
●● Icons are not displayed for smiling or sleeping subjects and moving
children in drive modes other than [ ] (= 37, = 43), and when
[Hg Lamp Corr.] is set to [On] and scenes are automatically corrected
(= 50).
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
●● Backlit icons are not displayed for moving children and smiling people
when the flash is set to [ ].
Tv, Av, and M Mode
●● Icons for babies (including smiling and sleeping babies) and moving
children are displayed when [Face ID] is set to [On] and faces of
registered babies (less than two years old) or children (2 – 12 years
old) are detected (= 45). Confirm beforehand that the date and time
are correct (= 20).
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
●● Depending on the scene, the scene icon may not match actual
shooting conditions, or it may not be possible to shoot with your
expected effect, color, or brightness. Try shooting in [ ] mode
(= 70).
Accessories
Appendix
Index
36
Continuous Shooting Scenes
If you shoot a still image when the following scene icons are displayed,
the camera will shoot continuously. If you press the shutter button halfway
when one of the following icons in the table is displayed, [ ], [ ], or [ ]
icon will be displayed to inform you that the camera will shoot continuous
images.
Smiling
(including Babies)
Sleeping
(including Babies)
Children
Consecutive images are captured, and the camera
analyzes details such as facial expressions to save
the image determined to be the best.
Beautiful shots of sleeping faces, created by
combining consecutive shots to reduce camera
shake and image noise.
The AF-assist beam will not light up, the flash will
not fire. The shutter sound will not be played.
So you don’t miss a photo opportunity of children
who move around, the camera will capture three
consecutive images for each shot.
●● In some scenes, expected images may not be saved, and images
may not look as expected.
●● Focus, image brightness, and color are determined by the first
shot.
●● When you want to shoot single images only, press the [
].
choose [ ] in the menu, and then select [
Before Use
Image Stabilization Icons
 Still Images  Movies
Optimal image stabilization for the shooting conditions (Intelligent IS) is
automatically applied, and the following icons are displayed.
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Image stabilization for still images (Normal)
Camera Basics
Image stabilization for still images when panning (Panning)*
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Corrects the angle shake or shift shake when you take a macro
shot (Hybrid IS). During movie recording, [
] is displayed,
furthermore, [ ] corrects the camera shake.
Image stabilization for movies, reducing strong camera shake, as
when shooting while walking (Dynamic)
Image stabilization for slow camera shake, such as when
shooting movies at telephoto (Powered)
No image stabilization, because the camera is mounted on
a tripod or held still by other means. However, during movie
recording, [ ] is displayed, and image stabilization to
counteract wind or other sources of vibration is used (Tripod IS).
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
* Displayed when you pan, following moving subjects with the camera. When you
follow subjects moving horizontally, image stabilization only counteracts vertical
camera shake, and horizontal stabilization stops. Similarly, when you follow subjects
moving vertically, image stabilization only counteracts horizontal camera shake.
●● To cancel image stabilization, set [IS Mode] to [Off] (= 83). In
this case, an IS icon is not displayed.
] mode, no [
] icon is displayed.
●● In [
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
] button,
37
On-Screen Frames
Before Use
Common, Convenient Features
 Still Images Basic Guide
 Movies
In [
] mode, a variety of frames are displayed once the camera
detects subjects you are aiming the camera at.
●● A white frame is displayed around the subject (or person’s face)
determined by the camera to be the main subject, and gray frames
are displayed around other detected faces. Frames follow moving
subjects within a certain range to keep them in focus. However, if the
camera detects subject movement, only the white frame will remain on
the screen.
Zooming In Closer on Subjects (Digital Zoom)
 Still Images  Movies
Camera Basics
When distant subjects are too far away to enlarge using the optical zoom,
use digital zoom for up to about 160x enlargement.
1 Move the zoom lever toward [
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
].
Other Shooting Modes
●● Hold the lever until zooming stops.
●● When you are pressing the shutter button halfway and the camera
detects subject movement, a blue frame is displayed, and the focus
and image brightness are constantly adjusted (Servo AF).
●● Depending on the scene or subject, no frames may be displayed,
frames may not displayed around desired subjects, or frames may
be displayed on the background or similar areas. Try shooting in
[ ] mode (= 70).
Advanced Guide
●● Zooming stops at the largest possible
zoom factor (before the image becomes
noticeably grainy), which is then indicated
on the screen.
(1)
2 Move the zoom lever toward [
again.
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Playback Mode
]
Wi-Fi Functions
●● The camera zooms in even closer on the
subject.
Setting Menu
●● (1) is the current zoom factor.
Accessories
Appendix
●● Moving the zoom lever will display the zoom bar (which indicates
the zoom position). The zoom bar is color-coded to indicate the
zoom range.
-- White range: optical zoom range where the image will not
appear grainy.
-- Yellow range: digital zoom range where the image is not
noticeably grainy (ZoomPlus).
-- Blue range: digital zoom range where the image will appear
grainy.
●● Because the blue range will not be available at some recording
pixel settings (= 49), the maximum zoom factor can be
achieved by following step 1.
Index
38
●● To deactivate digital zoom, choose MENU (= 29) > [
[Digital Zoom] > [Off].
] tab >
Easily Reacquiring Subjects after Manual
Zooming (Framing Assist – Seek)
 Still Images Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
 Movies
If you lose track of a subject while zooming in, you can find it more easily
by temporarily zooming out.
1 Look for the lost subject.
●● Press and hold the [
●● Some shooting information is not displayed while the camera is
zoomed out.
●● During movie shooting, the white frame is not displayed if you
press the [ ] button. Also note that a changed zoom factor and
camera operating sounds will be recorded.
] button.
●● The camera zooms out and displays a
white frame around the area previously
shown (before you pressed the [ ]
button).
●● If you prefer to shoot at the zoom factor of the screen in step 1,
press the shutter button all the way down.
●● You can adjust the zoom factor that the camera reverts to when
you release the [ ] button by moving the zoom lever to resize
the white frame while you hold the [ ] button.
●● To adjust the area displayed when the [ ] button is pressed,
Display Area], and
access MENU (= 29) > [ ] tab > [
choose one of the three options.
●● The zoom factor cannot be changed with the [ ] button after
you press the shutter button all the way down in self-timer mode
(= 42).
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
2 Reacquire the subject.
●● Aim the camera so that the subject enters
the white frame, and then release the
[ ] button.
Appendix
Index
●● The previous magnification is now
restored, so that the area within the white
frame fills the screen again.
39
Zooming Automatically According to the
Movement of the Subject (Auto Zoom)
 Still Images  Movies
The camera automatically zooms in and out to keep the detected face
(= 77) at a constant size on the screen. If the person moves closer, the
camera will automatically zoom out, and vice versa. This size can also be
adjusted, as needed.
1 Enter [
] Auto mode.
●● Press and release the [
●● [
●● A face may not be displayed at a constant size relative to the
screen at some zoom factors, or if the person’s head is tilted or
facing the camera indirectly.
●● During movie recording, a changed zoom factor and camera
operating sounds are recorded.
Auto is on, some shooting information is not displayed,
●● When
and some shooting settings cannot be configured.
●● The camera will not auto zoom to fit multiple people in the screen
when multiple faces are detected while shooting a movie.
●● Auto zoom cannot be used while using the continuous shooting
function.
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
] button quickly.
] is displayed.
●● A white frame is displayed when a face
is detected. The camera will zoom
automatically to fit the person (subject) in
the screen.
●● When multiple faces are detected, the
main subject is displayed in a white frame
and the other faces (maximum of two) are
displayed in gray frames. The camera will
zoom automatically to fit multiple people
in the screen.
P Mode
●● If multiple faces are detected in step 1, press the [ ] button to
choose the face for automatic zooming.
●● If the person detected by the camera moves toward the edge of
the screen, the camera zooms out to keep the person in view.
●● The zoom factor cannot be changed after you press the shutter
button all the way down in self-timer mode (= 42).
●● Depending on the shoot conditions and the subject’s movement,
the face size may not maintained in order to fit the subject on the
screen.
●● When the camera cannot detect a face, move the zoom to any
position and stop the zoom until the face is detected.
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
2 Shoot.
●● The frames are displayed even after
taking the shot and the camera will zoom
automatically.
Appendix
Index
●● To cancel this mode, press the [ ]
button again. [ Auto: Off] is displayed.
40
Adjusting the Constant Face Display Size
●● When [ Auto: On] is set, press the
[ ][ ] buttons to choose the desired
option.
●● The camera zooms automatically to keep
faces at the specified size.
Auto
Face
Upper Body
Whole
Body
Manual
The camera will auto zoom according to the movement
of the person (subject) to keep the person in the
screen.
When multiple faces are detected, the camera will auto
zoom to keep multiple people in the screen.
Keep faces large enough to show facial expressions
clearly.
Keep faces small enough to show the person’s upper
body.
Keep faces small enough to show the person’s entire
body.
Keep faces at the size specified by moving the zoom
lever. Move the zoom lever, and then release the zoom
lever once the desired size has been obtained.
●● The face size can also be adjusted in MENU (= 29) > [ ]
Auto Settings] > [
Auto Zoom]. You can choose [Off]
tab > [
to deactivate this feature and use only the feature described in
“Easily Reacquiring Subjects with Auto Zooming (Seek Assist)”
(= 41).
●● You can zoom in or out with the zoom lever when [Face], [Upper
Body], or [Whole Body] is selected, but the original zoom factor
will be restored in a few seconds after you release the lever.
●● You can clear your specified face size during movie recording by
pressing the [ ] button.
●● Face sizes cannot be changed during movie recording.
Easily Reacquiring Subjects with Auto Zooming
(Seek Assist)
 Still Images  Movies
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
If zooming in causes you to lose track of a subject, and you move the
camera to look for them, the camera can automatically zoom out to help
you find the subject.
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
1 Enter [ ] Auto mode (= 40).
2 Look for the lost subject.
Other Shooting Modes
●● When you move the camera to look for
the subject, the camera zooms out to
help you find it.
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M Mode
3 Reacquire the subject.
Playback Mode
●● Once you find the subject and stop
moving the camera, the camera zooms
in again.
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
4 Shoot.
●● To cancel this mode, press the [ ]
button again. [ Auto: Off] is displayed.
41
●● The camera does not zoom out automatically while [ ] is
displayed around a detected face, even if you move the camera.
●● When the feature described in “Zooming Automatically According
to the Movement of the Subject (Auto Zoom)” (= 40) is
deactivated, [ ] is displayed around a detected face, and the
camera automatically zooms out when moved.
●● Zooming is not possible while the shutter button is pressed
halfway.
●● To deactivate this feature and use only the feature described in
“Zooming Automatically According to the Movement of the Subject
(Auto Zoom)” (= 40), choose MENU (= 29) > [ ] tab >
Auto Settings] > [Seek Assist] > [Off].
[
Using the Self-Timer
 Still Images  Movies
With the self-timer, you can include yourself in group photos or other
timed shots. The camera will shoot about 10 seconds after you press the
shutter button.
1 Configure the setting.
●● Press the [ ] button, choose [ ] (either
press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial), and then press the [ ] button.
●● Once the setting is complete, [
displayed.
] is
2 Shoot.
Before Use
●● For Still Images: Press the shutter button
halfway to focus on the subject, and then
press it all the way down.
Basic Guide
●● For Movies: Press the movie button.
Advanced Guide
●● Once you start the self-timer, the lamp
will blink and the camera will play a selftimer sound.
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
●● Two seconds before the shot, the blinking
and sound will speed up. (The lamp will
remain lit in case the flash fires.)
Other Shooting Modes
●● To cancel shooting after you have
triggered the self-timer, press the
[
] button.
P Mode
●● To restore the original setting, choose [
in step 1.
Tv, Av, and M Mode
]
Playback Mode
Using the Self-Timer to Avoid Camera Shake
 Still Images Wi-Fi Functions
 Movies
This option delays shutter release until about two seconds after you
have pressed the shutter button. If the camera is unsteady while you are
pressing the shutter button, it will not affect your shot.
Setting Menu
Accessories
●● Follow step 1 in “Using the Self-Timer”
(= 42) and choose [ ].
●● Once the setting is complete, [ ] is
displayed.
●● Follow step 2 in “Using the Self-Timer”
(= 42) to shoot.
Appendix
Index
42
Customizing the Self-Timer
 Still Images  Movies
Before Use
Continuous Shooting
You can specify the delay (0 – 30 seconds) and number of shots (1 – 10).
1 Choose [
].
●● Following step 1 in “Using the Self-Timer”
(= 42), choose [ ] and press the
[
] button.
2
Configure the setting.
●● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose the
delay time or number of shots.
●● Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose a value, and then press the
[ ] button.
●● Once the setting is complete, [
displayed.
 Still Images  Movies
In [
] mode, hold the shutter button all the way down to shoot
continuously.
For details on the continuous shooting speed, see “Camera” (= 177).
1
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Configure the setting.
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
●● Press the [ ] button, choose [ ] in the
menu, and then choose [ ] (= 28).
●● Once the setting is complete, [
displayed.
Other Shooting Modes
] is
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M Mode
] is
●● Follow step 2 in “Using the Self-Timer”
(= 42) to shoot.
●● For movies recorded using the self-timer, recording begins after
your specified delay time, but specifying the number of shots has
no effect.
●● When you specify multiple shots, image brightness and white
balance are determined by the first shot. More time is required
between shots when the flash fires or when you have specified
to take many shots. Shooting will stop automatically when the
memory card becomes full.
●● When a delay longer than two seconds is specified, two seconds
before the shot, the lamp blinking and self-timer sound will speed
up. (The lamp will remain lit in case the flash fires.)
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
2 Shoot.
Setting Menu
●● Hold the shutter button all the way down
to shoot continuously.
●● During continuous shooting, the focus, exposure, and colors are
locked at the position/level determined when you pressed the
shutter button halfway.
●● Cannot be used with the self-timer (= 42).
●● Shooting may stop momentarily or continuous shooting may slow
down depending on shooting conditions, camera settings, and the
zoom position.
●● As more shots are taken, shooting may slow down.
●● Shooting may slow down if the flash fires.
●● Multi-area White Balance (= 32) is not available. Similarly, [Hg
Lamp Corr.] (= 50) is set to [Off] and cannot be changed.
Accessories
Appendix
Index
43
Image Display during Playback
Each set of images shot continuously is managed as a single group,
and only the first image in that group will be displayed. To indicate that
the image is part of a group, [
] is displayed in the upper left of the
screen.
●● If you erase a grouped image (= 98), all images in the group
are also erased. Be careful when erasing images.
●● Grouped images can be played back individually (= 92) and
ungrouped (= 92).
●● Protecting (= 96) a grouped image will protect all images in
the group.
●● Grouped images can be viewed individually when played back
using Image Search (= 91) or Smart Shuffle (= 95). In this
case, images are temporarily ungrouped.
●● The following actions are not available for grouped images:
editing Face ID information (= 93), magnifying (= 94),
tagging as favorites (= 101), editing (= 102), printing
(= 153), setting up individual image printing (= 157), or
adding to a photobook (= 158). To do these things, either
view grouped images individually (= 92) or cancel grouping
(= 92) first.
Using Face ID
If you register a person ahead of time, the camera will detect that person’s
face, and prioritize focus, brightness, and color for that person when
shooting. In [
] mode, the camera can detect babies and children
based on registered birthdays and optimize settings for them when
shooting.
This function is also useful when searching for a specific registered
person among a large number of images (= 91).
Registering people ahead of time is also a good way to let you extract
them easily for a Story Highlights album (= 108).
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Personal Information
Tv, Av, and M Mode
●● Information such as images of a face (face info) registered with
Face ID, and personal information (name, birthday) will be saved
on the camera. Additionally, when registered people are detected,
their names will be recorded in still images. When using the Face ID
function, be careful when sharing the camera or images with others,
and when posting images online where many others can view them.
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
●● When disposing of a camera or transferring it to another person after
using Face ID, be sure to erase all information (registered faces,
names, and birthdays) from the camera (= 48).
Accessories
Appendix
Index
44
Registering Face ID Information
You can register information (face info, names, and birthdays) for up to 12
people to use with Face ID.
1
●● After [Register?] is displayed, press
the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial
to choose [OK], and then press the [ ]
button.
Before Use
●● The [Edit Profile] screen is displayed.
Advanced Guide
Basic Guide
Access the setting screen.
●● Press the [
] button, choose [Face
ID Settings] on the [ ] tab, and then
press the [ ] button (= 29).
●● Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [Add to Registry], and then
press the [ ] button.
●● Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [
dial to choose [Add a New Face], and
then press the [ ] button.
]
Camera Basics
3 Register the person’s name and
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
birthday.
●● Press the [ ] button to access the
keyboard, and then enter the name
(= 30).
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
●● To register a birthday, on the [Edit Profile]
screen, choose [Birthday] (either press
the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial),
and then press the [ ] button.
Tv, Av, and M Mode
●● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose an
option.
Wi-Fi Functions
●● Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [
dial to specify the date.
●● When finished, press the [
Playback Mode
]
Setting Menu
Accessories
] button.
4 Save the settings.
2 Register face information.
●● Aim the camera so that the face of the
person you want to register is inside the
gray frame at the center of the screen.
●● A white frame on the person’s face
indicates that the face is recognized.
Make sure a white frame is displayed on
the face, and then shoot.
●● Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [Save], and then press the
[ ] button.
Appendix
Index
●● After a message is displayed, press the
[ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial to
choose [Yes], and then press the [ ]
button.
●● If the face is not recognized, you cannot
register face information.
45
5 Continue registering face
information.
●● To register up to 4 more points of face
information (expressions or angles),
repeat step 2.
●● Registered faces are more easily
recognized if you add a variety of face
information. In addition to a head-on
angle, add a slight side angle, a shot
when smiling, and shots inside and
outside.
●● The flash will not fire when following step 2.
●● If you do not register a birthday in step 3, Babies or Children icons
] mode.
(= 36) will not be displayed in [
●● You can overwrite registered face info, and add face info later if
you have not filled all 5 face info slots (= 45).
Shooting
If you register a person ahead of time, the camera will prioritize that
person as the main subject, and optimize focus, brightness, and color for
that person when shooting.
●● When you point the camera toward
people, the names of up to 3 registered
people will be displayed when they are
detected.
●● Shoot.
●● Displayed names will be recorded in still
images. The names of detected people
(maximum total of 5) will be recorded,
even if the names are not displayed.
●● People other than those registered may be mistakenly detected
as the registered person if they share similar facial features.
●● Registered people may not be correctly detected if the captured
image or scene differs drastically from the registered face
information.
●● If a registered face is not detected, or not easily detected,
overwrite registered information with new face info. Registering
face info right before shooting will allow for easier detection of
registered faces.
●● If a person is mistakenly detected as another person and you
continue shooting, you can edit or erase the name recorded in the
image during playback (= 93).
●● Because faces of babies and children change quickly as they
grow, you should update their face info regularly (= 45).
●● If you don’t want names to be recorded in still images, choose
[Face ID Settings] on the [ ] tab, choose [Face ID], and then
choose [Off].
●● You can check names recorded in images in the playback screen
(simple information display) (= 88).
] mode, names are not displayed on the shooting screen,
●● In [
but they will be recorded in still images.
●● Names recorded in continuous shooting (= 43, = 80)
continue to be recorded in the same position as the first shot.
Names are recorded in the same position as the first shot for
additional shots, even if subjects move.
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Checking and Editing Registered Information
Index
1 Access the [Check/Edit Info] screen.
●● Following step 1 in “Registering Face ID
Information” (= 45), choose [Check/
Edit Info] and press the [ ] button.
46
2 Choose a person to check or edit
their information.
●● Press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons or turn
the [ ] dial to choose the person whose
information you want to check or edit, and
then press the [ ] button.
3 Check or edit the information as
needed.
●● To check a name or birthday, choose [Edit
Profile] (either press the [ ][ ] buttons
or turn the [ ] dial), and then press the
[ ] button. On the screen displayed,
you can edit the name or birthday as
described in step 3 of “Registering Face
ID Information” (= 45).
●● To check face information, choose [Face
Info List] (either press the [ ][ ] buttons
or turn the [ ] dial), and then press
the [ ] button. Press the [ ] button
on the screen displayed, choose face
information to erase by pressing the
[ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons or turning the [ ]
dial, and then press the [ ] button. After
[Erase?] is displayed, press the [ ][ ]
buttons or turn the [ ] dial to choose
[OK], and then press the [ ] button to
erase the face information.
●● Even if you change names in [Edit Profile], the names recorded in
previously shot images will remain the same.
Overwriting and Adding Face Information
You can overwrite existing face information with new face info. You should
update face information regularly, especially with babies and children, as
their faces change quickly as they grow.
You can also add face information when all 5 face info slots have not
been filled.
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
1 Access the [Add Face Info] screen.
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
●● Following step 1 in “Registering Face ID
Information” (= 45), choose [Add Face
Info] and press the [ ] button.
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
2 Choose a person to overwrite their
Tv, Av, and M Mode
face info.
●● Press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons or turn
the [ ] dial to choose the name of the
person whose face info you want to
overwrite, and then press the [ ] button.
Playback Mode
●● If five items of face info have already
been registered, a message will be
displayed. Choose [OK] (either press the
[ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial), and
then press the [ ] button.
Setting Menu
●● If less than five items of face info are
registered, go to step 4 to add face
information.
Wi-Fi Functions
Accessories
Appendix
Index
3 Choose the face info to overwrite.
●● Press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons or turn
the [ ] dial to choose the face info to
overwrite, and then press the [ ] button.
47
4 Register face information.
●● Follow step 2 in “Registering Face ID
Information” (= 45) to shoot, and then
register the new face information.
●● Registered faces are more easily
recognized if you add a variety of face
information. In addition to a head-on
angle, add a slight side angle, a shot
when smiling, and shots inside and
outside.
●● You cannot add face information if all 5 information slots are filled.
Follow the steps above to overwrite face information.
●● You can follow the above steps to register new face info when
there is at least one slot open; however, you cannot overwrite
any face information. Instead of overwriting face info, first erase
unwanted existing info (= 46), and then register new face
information (= 45) as needed.
Erasing Registered Information
You can erase information (face info, names, and birthdays) registered
to Face ID. However, names recorded in previously shot images will not
be erased.
1 Access the [Erase Info] screen.
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
●● Follow step 1 in “Registering Face ID
Information” (= 45) and choose [Erase
Info].
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
2 Choose a person to erase their
P Mode
information.
Tv, Av, and M Mode
●● Press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons or turn
the [ ] dial to choose the name of the
person to erase, and then press the [ ]
button.
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
●● After [Erase?] is displayed, press the
[ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial to
choose [OK], and then press the [ ]
button.
Setting Menu
Accessories
●● If you erase a registered person’s info, you will not be able to
display their name (= 90), overwrite their info (= 93), or
search for images that include them (= 91).
Appendix
Index
●● You can also erase names in image information (= 93).
48
Before Use
Changing Image Resolution (Size)
Image Customization Features
 Still Images Changing the Aspect Ratio
 Still Images  Movies
 Movies
Choose from 4 levels of image resolution, as follows. For guidelines on
how many shots at each resolution setting can fit on a memory card, see
“Number of Shots per Memory Card” (= 179).
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
●● Press the [ ] button, choose [ ] in the
menu, and choose the desired option
(= 28).
Change the image aspect ratio (ratio of width to height) as follows.
●● Press the [ ] button, choose [ ] in the
menu, and choose the desired option
(= 28).
●● Once the setting is complete, the screen
aspect ratio will be updated.
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
●● The option you configured is now
displayed.
Other Shooting Modes
●● To restore the original setting, repeat this
process but choose [ ].
P Mode
●● To restore the original setting, repeat this
process but choose [ ].
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Used for display on widescreen HDTVs or similar display devices.
Same aspect ratio as 35mm film. Used for printing images at 5 x
7-inch or postcard sizes.
Native aspect ratio of the camera screen. Used for display on
standard-definition televisions or similar display devices. Also used
for printing images at 3.5 x 5-inch or A-series sizes.
Guidelines for Choosing Resolution Based on Paper
Size (for 4:3 Images)
Setting Menu
Accessories
A2 (16.5 x 23.4 in.)
A3 – A5 (11.7 x 16.5 – 5.8 x 8.3 in.)
Appendix
3.5 x 5 in., 5 x 7 in., Postcard
For e-mailing and similar purposes
Index
Square aspect ratio.
●● Not available in [
●● Not available in [
] mode.
] mode.
49
Correcting Greenish Image Areas from Mercury
Lamps
 Still Images  Movies
In [
] mode, subjects or background in shots of evening scenes
illuminated by mercury lamps may appear to have a greenish tinge. This
greenish tinge can be corrected automatically when shooting, using Multiarea White Balance.
 Still Images  Movies
3 image quality settings are available. For guidelines on the maximum
movie length at each level of image quality that will fit on a memory card,
see “Recording Time per Memory Card” (= 179).
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
●● Press the [ ] button, choose [
] in
the menu, and choose the desired option
(= 28).
●● Press the [
] button, choose [Hg
Lamp Corr.] on the [ ] tab, and then
choose [On] (= 29).
●● Once the setting is complete, [
displayed.
Before Use
Changing Movie Image Quality
] is
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
●● The option you configured is now
displayed.
Other Shooting Modes
●● To restore the original setting, repeat this
].
process but choose [
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M Mode
●● To restore the original setting, repeat this
process but choose [Off].
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Image
Quality
●● After you are finished shooting under mercury lamps, you should
set [Hg Lamp Corr.] back to [Off]. Otherwise, green hues not
caused by mercury lamps may be corrected by mistake.
●● Try taking some test shots first to make sure you obtain the
desired results.
●● In continuous shooting (= 43), this setting is set to [Off] and
cannot be changed.
Resolution
Frame Rate
Details
1920 x 1080
30 fps
For shooting in Full HD
1280 x 720
30 fps
For shooting in HD
640 x 480
30 fps
For shooting in standard
definition
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
●● In [
] and [
] modes, black bars are displayed on the
top and bottom edges of the screen. They indicate that this image
area cannot be recorded.
] is also available, offering smoother motion
●● In [ ] mode, [
(= 66).
50
Before Use
Magnifying the Area in Focus
Helpful Shooting Features
 Still Images Check the focus by pressing the shutter button halfway to enlarge the
portion of the image in the AF frame.
Displaying Grid Lines
 Still Images  Movies
Grid lines can be displayed on the screen for vertical and horizontal
reference while shooting.
●● Press the [
Lines] on the [
[On] (= 29).
 Movies
] button, choose [Grid
] tab, and then choose
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1 Configure the setting.
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
●● Press the [
] button, choose
[AF‑Point Zoom] on the [ ] tab, and
then choose [On] (= 29).
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
●● Once the setting is complete, grid lines
are displayed on the screen.
Tv, Av, and M Mode
●● To restore the original setting, repeat this
process but choose [Off].
Playback Mode
2 Check the focus.
Wi-Fi Functions
●● Press the shutter button halfway. The
face detected as the main subject is now
magnified.
●● Grid lines are not recorded in your shots.
Setting Menu
Accessories
●● To restore the original setting, choose
[Off] in step 1.
●● The area in focus is not magnified in the following cases when the
shutter button is pressed halfway.
-- If a face was not detected, if the person is too close to the
camera and their face is too large for the screen, or if the
camera detects subject movement
-- When digital zoom is used (= 38)
-- When Tracking AF is used (= 78)
-- When a TV is used as a display (= 148)
] mode.
●● Not available in [
Appendix
Index
51
Deactivating Auto Level
Before Use
Changing the IS Mode Settings
 Still Images  Movies
 Still Images Normally, auto leveling keeps the movie image horizontally level during
recording. To cancel this feature, choose [Disable].
●● Press the [
] button, choose
[ Auto level] on the [ ] tab, and then
choose [Disable] (= 29).
 Movies
Deactivating Image Stabilization
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
When the camera is held still (as when shooting from a tripod), you should
set image stabilization to [Off] to deactivate it.
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
1 Access the setting screen.
●● Press the [
] button, choose [IS
Settings] on the [ ] tab, and then press
the [ ] button (= 29).
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
2 Configure the setting.
●● Once movie recording begins, the image display area changes
and subjects are enlarged (= 53).
Tv, Av, and M Mode
●● Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the
[ ] dial to choose [IS Mode], and then
choose [Off] by pressing the [ ][ ]
buttons.
Continuous
Off
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Optimal image stabilization for the shooting conditions is
automatically applied (Intelligent IS) (= 37).
Deactivates image stabilization.
Accessories
Appendix
Index
52
Recording Movies with Subjects at the Same Size
Shown before Recording
 Still Images  Movies
Normally, once movie recording begins, the image display area changes
and subjects are enlarged to allow the image to be kept as horizontally
level as possible and for correction of significant camera shake.
To record movies with subjects at the same size shown before shooting,
you can reduce image stabilization and cancel auto leveling.
●● Set [ Auto level] to [Disable] as
described in “Deactivating Auto Level”
(= 52).
●● Follow step 1 in “Deactivating Image
Stabilization” (= 52) to access the [IS
Settings] screen.
●● Choose [Dynamic IS], and then choose
[Low] (= 29).
Customizing Camera Operation
Before Use
Customize shooting functions on the [ ] tab of the menu screen as follows.
For instructions on menu functions, see “Using the Menu Screen”
(= 29).
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Deactivating the AF-Assist Beam
 Still Images Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
 Movies
A lamp lights up to help you focus when you press the shutter button
halfway in low-light conditions. You can deactivate the lamp.
Other Shooting Modes
●● Press the [
] button, choose
[AF‑assist Beam] on the [ ] tab, and
then choose [Off] (= 29).
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M Mode
●● To restore the original setting, repeat this
process but choose [On].
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
●● You can also set [IS Mode] to [Off], so that subjects are recorded
at the same size shown before shooting.
●● [Dynamic IS] is not available when [IS Mode] is set to [Off]
(= 52).
], it is set to [Standard] and
●● When the movie quality is [
cannot be changed.
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
53
Preventing the Red-Eye Reduction Lamp from
Lighting Up
 Still Images Before Use
Changing the Image Display Style after Shots
 Still Images  Movies
A red-eye reduction lamp lights up to reduce red-eye when the flash is
used in low-light shots. You can deactivate the lamp.
1 Access the [Flash Settings] screen.
 Movies
You can change how long images are displayed and what information is
displayed immediately after shooting.
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Changing the Image Display Period after Shots
1 Access the [Review image after
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
shooting] screen.
●● Press the [
] button, choose [Flash
Settings] on the [ ] tab, and then press
the [ ] button (= 29).
Other Shooting Modes
●● Press the [
] button, choose
[Review image after shooting] on the
[ ] tab, and then press the [ ] button
(= 29).
2 Configure the setting.
●● Choose [Off] (= 29).
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M Mode
2 Configure the setting.
●● To restore the original setting, repeat this
process but choose [On].
Playback Mode
●● Choose [Display Time], press the [ ][ ]
buttons to choose the desired option.
Wi-Fi Functions
●● To restore the original setting, repeat this
process but choose [Quick].
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Quick
2 sec.,
4 sec.,
8 sec.
Hold
Off
Displays images only until you can shoot again.
Displays images for the specified time. Even while the
shot is displayed, you can take another shot by pressing
the shutter button halfway again.
Displays images until you press the shutter button
halfway.
No image display after shots.
54
Changing the Screen Displayed after Shots
Change the way images are displayed after shots as follows.
1 Set [Display Time] to [2 sec.],
[4 sec.], [8 sec.], or [Hold] (= 54).
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
2 Configure the setting.
Camera Basics
●● Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the
[ ] dial to choose [Display Info]. Press
the [ ][ ] buttons to choose the desired
option.
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
●● To restore the original setting, repeat this
process but choose [Off].
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Playback Mode
Off
Displays only the image.
Detailed
Displays shooting details (= 167).
●● When [Display Time] (= 54) is set to [Off] or [Quick], [Display
Info] is set to [Off] and cannot be changed.
] button while an image is displayed after
●● By pressing the [
shooting, you can switch the display information. Note that the
settings of [Display Info] are not changed. You can also erase
images by pressing the [ ] button, or protect (= 96) or tag
images as favorites (= 101) by pressing the [ ] button.
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
55
Before Use
Brightness / Color Customization
(Live View Control)
 Still Images Other Shooting Modes
Basic Guide
 Movies
Advanced Guide
Image brightness or colors when shooting can be easily customized as
follows.
1 Enter [
Shoot more effectively in various scenes, and take shots enhanced with
unique image effects or captured using special functions
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
] mode.
●● Set the mode dial to [
2
Camera Basics
].
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Configure the setting.
Tv, Av, and M Mode
●● Press the [ ] button to access the
setting screen. Press the [ ][ ] buttons
to choose a setting item, and then press
the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial to
adjust the value as you watch the screen.
●● Press the [
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
] button.
Setting Menu
3 Shoot.
Brightness
Color
Tone
For brighter images, adjust the level to the right, and
for darker images, adjust it to the left.
For more vivid images, adjust the level to the right, and
for more subdued images, adjust it to the left.
For a warm, reddish tone, adjust the level to the right,
and for a cool, bluish tone, adjust it to the left.
Accessories
Appendix
Index
56
Applying Effects Automatically
(Creative Shot)
 Still Images  Movies
Enjoying a Variety of Images from Each Shot
The camera determines the subject and shooting conditions, automatically
applying special effects and recomposing the shot to emphasize the
subject. Six still images are recorded for each shot. You can capture
multiple still images with effects using camera-determined settings.
1 Enter [
●● Shooting will take some time when the flash fires, but hold the
camera steady until the shutter sound is played three times.
●● The six images are managed together as a group (= 92).
●● Simultaneous display of the six images as shown in step 2 is only
available immediately after you shoot.
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Choosing Effects
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
You can choose effects for images captured in [
●● After choosing [
[
] button.
] mode.
Other Shooting Modes
] mode, press the
P Mode
●● Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose the effect, and then press
the [ ] button.
] mode.
●● Set the mode dial to [
Before Use
].
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Playback Mode
2 Shoot.
●● Press the shutter button all the way
down. As you shoot, the shutter sound is
played three times.
●● After the six images are displayed
in succession, they are displayed
simultaneously for about two seconds.
●● To keep the images displayed until you
press the shutter button halfway, press
the [ ] button. You can choose an image
for full-screen display by pressing the
[ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons or turning the [ ]
dial, and then press the [ ] button.
Auto
All effects
Retro
Images resemble old photos
Monochrome
Images are generated in one color
Special
Bold, distinctive-looking images
Natural
Subdued, natural-looking images
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
●● To return to the original display, press the
] button.
[
57
Recording Movies with a Variety of Effects
Let the camera determine subjects and shooting conditions when you
record movies, and filters and effects such as playback in slow or fast
motion will be added automatically. Once you have recorded a few
movies, up to four are automatically combined to create a Creative Shot
movie of 15 – 25 seconds. Note that sound is not recorded in this mode.
1 Enter [
] mode.
●● Set the mode dial to [
Before Use
Moving Subjects (Sports)
 Still Images  Movies
Shoot continuously as the camera focuses on moving subjects.
1 Enter [
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
] mode.
●● Set the mode dial to [
Camera Basics
].
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
].
●● Press the movie button. Recording
begins, and a bar is displayed to indicate
the elapsed time.
●● Recording stops automatically in 3 – 6
seconds.
3 Record the second to fourth movies.
●● Repeat step 2 three times to record four
movies.
●● Even if you do not record four movies that day, a Creative Shot
movie will be saved as a separate file once the date changes.
●● Effects are generally applied consistently to movies 1 – 4, but you
can also change the effect in each movie (= 57).
●● Individual chapters can be edited (= 107).
Creative Shot Movie Playback
You can choose and play back Creative Shot movies recorded in [
mode (= 89).
Other Shooting Modes
2 Focus.
2 Record the first movie.
]
P Mode
●● While you are pressing the shutter button
halfway, the camera will continue to
adjust focus and image brightness where
the blue frame is displayed.
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Playback Mode
3 Shoot.
Wi-Fi Functions
●● Hold the shutter button all the way down
to shoot continuously.
●● In [ ] mode, shots may look grainy because the ISO speed
(= 72) is increased to suit the shooting conditions.
●● For details on the shooting range in [ ] mode, see “Shooting
Range” (= 178).
●● There may be a delay after continuous shooting before you can
shoot again. Note that some types of memory cards may delay
your next shot even longer.
●● Shooting may slow down depending on shooting conditions,
camera settings, and the zoom position.
●● Even if you are shooting in [ ] Auto mode (= 40), continuous
shooting is not supported.
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
58
Shooting under Low Light (Low
Light)
Specific Scenes
Still Images
Choose a mode matching the shooting scene, and the camera will
automatically configure the settings for optimal shots.
1 Enter [
●● Shoot with minimal camera and subject
shake even in low-light conditions.
] mode.
●● Set the mode dial to [
Movies
].
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Shooting Fireworks (Fireworks)
Still Images
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Movies
●● Vivid shots of fireworks.
2 Choose a shooting mode.
Other Shooting Modes
●● Press the [ ] button, choose [ ] in the
menu, and then choose a shooting mode
(= 28).
3 Shoot.
Shooting Portraits (Portrait)
 Still Images  Movies
●● Take shots of people with a softening
effect.
Shooting Evening Scenes without
Using a Tripod (Handheld Night
Scene)
Still Images Movies
●● Beautiful shots of evening scenes or
portraits with evening scenery in the
background, without the need to hold the
camera very still (as with a tripod).
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M Mode
●● Subjects appear larger in [ ] mode compared to other modes.
●● In [ ] mode, shots may look grainy because the ISO speed
(= 72) is increased to suit the shooting conditions.
●● Because the camera will shoot continuously in [ ] mode, hold it
steady while shooting.
●● In [ ] mode, excessive motion blur or certain shooting conditions
may prevent you from obtaining the desired results.
●● In [ ] mode, mount the camera on a tripod or take other
measures to keep it still and prevent camera shake. Additionally,
you should set [IS Mode] to [Off] when using a tripod or other
means to secure the camera (= 83).
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
●● When you use a tripod for evening scenes, shooting in [
]
mode instead of [ ] mode will give better results (= 32).
●● In [ ] mode, resolution is [ ] (2592 x 1944 pixel) and it cannot
be changed.
●● In [ ] mode, although no frames are displayed when you press
the shutter button halfway, optimal focus is still determined.
●● A single image is created by combining
consecutive shots, reducing camera
shake and image noise.
59
Shooting with a Fish-Eye Lens Effect (Fish-Eye
Effect)
Applying Special Effects
Add a variety of effects to images when shooting.
 Still Images 1 Choose a shooting mode.
●● Follow steps 1 – 2 in “Specific Scenes”
(= 59) to choose a shooting mode.
 Movies
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Shoot with the distorting effect of a fish-eye lens.
1 Choose [
Camera Basics
].
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
●● Follow steps 1 – 2 in “Specific Scenes”
(= 59) and choose [ ].
2 Shoot.
S
hooting in Vivid Colors (Super
Vivid)
Still Images
Movies
●● Shots in rich, vivid colors.
Posterized Shots (Poster Effect)
Still Images
Movies
●● Shots that resemble an old poster or
illustration.
Other Shooting Modes
2 Choose an effect level.
●● Press the [
] button, choose an
effect level (either press the [ ][ ]
buttons or turn the [ ] dial), and then
press the [
] button again.
P Mode
●● A preview is shown of how your shot will
look with the effect applied.
Playback Mode
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
3 Shoot.
Setting Menu
●● Try taking some test shots first, to make sure you obtain the
desired results.
Accessories
Appendix
●● In [ ] and [ ] modes, try taking some test shots first, to make
sure you obtain the desired results.
Index
60
Shots Resembling Miniature Models (Miniature
Effect)
 Still Images 1
].
●● Follow steps 1 – 2 in “Specific Scenes”
(= 59) and choose [ ].
●● A white frame is displayed, indicating the
image area that will not be blurred.
2
Choose the area to keep in focus.
●● Press the [
Speed
 Movies
Creates the effect of a miniature model, by blurring image areas above
and below your selected area.
You can also make movies that look like scenes in miniature models by
choosing the playback speed before the movie is recorded. People and
objects in the scene will move quickly during playback. Note that sound is
not recorded.
Choose [
Playback Speed and Estimated Playback Time (for
One-Minute Clips)
] button.
●● Move the zoom lever to resize the frame,
and press the [ ][ ] buttons to move it.
3 For movies, choose the movie
playback speed.
●● Press the [
] button, and then
choose the speed by pressing the [ ][ ]
buttons or turning the [ ] dial.
Playback Time
Approx. 12 sec.
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Approx. 6 sec.
Camera Basics
Approx. 3 sec.
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Movies are played back at 30 fps.
●● The zoom is not available when shooting movies. Be sure to set
the zoom before shooting.
●● Try taking some test shots first, to make sure you obtain the
desired results.
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M Mode
●● To switch the orientation of the frame (from horizontal to vertical
or vice-versa), press the [ ] button in step 2. You can move the
frame in vertical orientation by pressing the [ ][ ] buttons.
●● Holding the camera vertically will change the orientation of the
frame.
] and [ ] at
●● Movie image quality is [ ] at an aspect ratio of [
] (= 49). These quality settings cannot
an aspect ratio of [
be changed.
●● The zoom factor cannot be changed with the [ ] button while the
screens in steps 2 and 3 are displayed, or while shooting movies.
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
4 Return to the shooting screen and
shoot.
●● Press the [
] button to return to the
shooting screen, and then shoot.
61
Shooting with a Toy Camera Effect (Toy Camera
Effect)
Still Images
Movies
This effect makes images resemble shots from a toy camera by vignetting
(darker, blurred image corners) and changing the overall color.
1 Choose [
].
●● Follow steps 1 – 2 in “Specific Scenes”
(= 59) and choose [
].
2 Choose a color tone.
●● Press the [
] button, choose a color
tone (either press the [ ][ ] buttons or
turn the [ ] dial), and then press the
[
] button again.
●● A preview is shown of how your shot will
look with the effect applied.
3 Shoot.
Standard
Shots resemble toy camera images.
Warm
Images have a warmer tone than with [Standard].
Cool
Images have a cooler tone than with [Standard].
●● Try taking some test shots first, to make sure you obtain the
desired results.
Before Use
Shooting with a Soft Focus Effect
 Still Images  Movies
This function allows you to shoot images as if a soft focus filter were
attached to the camera. You can adjust the effect level as desired.
1 Choose [
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
].
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
●● Follow steps 1 – 2 in “Specific Scenes”
(= 59) and choose [ ].
2 Choose an effect level.
Other Shooting Modes
●● Press the [
] button, choose an
effect level (either press the [ ][ ]
buttons or turn the [ ] dial), and then
press the [
] button again.
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M Mode
●● A preview is shown of how your shot will
look with the effect applied.
Playback Mode
3 Shoot.
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
●● Try taking some test shots first, to make sure you obtain the
desired results.
Accessories
Appendix
Index
62
Shooting in Monochrome
Special Modes for Other Purposes
 Still Images  Movies
Shoot images in black and white, sepia, or blue and white.
1 Choose [
].
●● Follow steps 1 – 2 in “Specific Scenes”
(= 59) and choose [ ].
2 Choose a color tone.
●● Press the [
] button, choose a color
tone (either press the [ ][ ] buttons or
turn the [ ] dial), and then press the
] button again.
[
●● A preview is shown of how your shot will
look with the effect applied.
3 Shoot.
B/W
Sepia
Blue
Black and white shots.
Sepia tone shots.
Blue and white shots.
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Auto Shooting after Face Detection (Smart
Shutter)
 Still Images Before Use
Camera Basics
 Movies
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Auto Shooting after Smile Detection (Smile)
Still Images
Other Shooting Modes
Movies
P Mode
The camera shoots automatically after detecting a smile, even without you
pressing the shutter button.
1 Choose [
Tv, Av, and M Mode
].
Playback Mode
●● Follow steps 1 – 2 in “Specific Scenes”
(= 59) and choose [ ], and then
press the [
] button.
Wi-Fi Functions
●● Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [ ], and then press the
[
] button.
Setting Menu
Accessories
●● The camera now enters shooting standby
mode, and [Smile Detection on] is
displayed.
2 Aim the camera at a person.
Appendix
Index
●● Each time the camera detects a smile, it
will shoot after the lamp lights up.
●● To pause smile detection, press the [ ]
button. Press the [ ] button again to
resume detection.
63
●● Switch to another mode when you finish shooting, or the camera
will continue shooting each time a smile is detected.
●● You can also shoot as usual by pressing the shutter button.
●● The camera can detect smiles more easily when subjects face
the camera and open their mouth wide enough so that teeth are
visible.
●● To change the number of shots, press the [ ][ ] buttons after
choosing [ ] in step 1.
●● Automatic shooting is not available while you are holding down
the [ ] button.
Auto Shooting after Wink Detection (Wink Self-Timer)
Still Images
down.
●● The camera now enters shooting standby
mode, and [Wink to take picture] is
displayed.
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
●● The lamp blinks and the self-timer sound
is played.
Camera Basics
4 Face the camera and wink.
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
●● The camera will shoot about two seconds
after detecting a wink by the person
whose face is inside the frame.
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
●● To cancel shooting after you have
triggered the self-timer, press the
] button.
[
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Movies
Aim the camera at a person and press the shutter button all the way
down. The camera will shoot about two seconds after a wink is detected.
1 Choose [
3 Press the shutter button all the way
].
●● Follow steps 1 – 2 in “Specific Scenes”
(= 59) and choose [ ], and then
press the [
] button.
●● Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [ ], and then press the
[
] button.
2 Compose the shot and press the
shutter button halfway.
●● Make sure a green frame is displayed
around the face of the person who will
wink.
Playback Mode
●● If the wink is not detected, wink again slowly and deliberately.
●● Winking may not be detected if eyes are obscured by hair, a hat,
or glasses.
●● Closing and opening both eyes at once will also be detected as
a wink.
●● If winking is not detected, the camera will shoot about 15 seconds
later.
●● To change the number of shots, press the [ ][ ] buttons after
choosing [ ] in step 1.
●● If no one is in the shooting area when the shutter button is
pressed all the way down, the camera will shoot after a person
enters the shooting area and winks.
●● The zoom factor cannot be changed with the [ ] button after you
press the shutter button all the way down.
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
64
Auto Shooting after Detecting New Person (Face SelfTimer)
Still Images
Movies
The camera will shoot about two seconds after detecting that the face
of another person (such as the photographer) has entered the shooting
area (= 77) . This is useful when including yourself in group photos or
similar shots.
1 Choose [
].
●● Follow steps 1 – 2 in “Specific Scenes”
(= 59) and choose [ ], and then
press the [
] button.
●● Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [ ], and then press the
[
] button.
2 Compose the shot and press the
4 Join the subjects in the shooting
area and look at the camera.
●● After the camera detects a new face, the
lamp blinking and self-timer sound will
speed up. (When the flash fires, the lamp
will remain lit.) About two seconds later,
the camera will shoot.
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
●● To cancel shooting after you have
triggered the self-timer, press the
] button.
[
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
●● Even if your face is not detected after you join the others in the
shooting area, the camera will shoot about 15 seconds later.
●● To change the number of shots, press the [ ][ ] buttons after
choosing [ ] in step 1.
●● The zoom factor cannot be changed with the [ ] button after you
press the shutter button all the way down.
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Playback Mode
shutter button halfway.
Wi-Fi Functions
●● Make sure a green frame is displayed
around the face you focus on and white
frames around other faces.
Setting Menu
3 Press the shutter button all the way
Accessories
down.
●● The camera now enters shooting standby
mode, and [Look straight at camera to
start count down] is displayed.
Appendix
Index
●● The lamp blinks and the self-timer sound
is played.
65
Recording Movies with Smoother Motion
Recording Various Movies
Still Images Movies
Recording Movies in Standard Mode
●● Follow steps in “Changing Movie Image
Quality” (= 50) and choose [
].
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Still Images 1 Enter [
Before Use
Record movies with smoother motion, at nearly double the frame rate, as
follows.
Movies
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
] mode.
●● Set the mode dial to [
].
●● Press the [ ] button, choose [ ] in the
menu, and then choose [ ] (= 28).
●● Black bars are displayed on the top and
bottom edges of the screen, and the
subject is slightly enlarged. The black
bars indicate image areas not recorded.
2 Configure the settings to suit the
movie (= 168).
3 Shoot.
●● Press the movie button.
●● To stop movie recording, press the movie
button again.
Other Shooting Modes
Locking or Changing Image Brightness before
Recording
 Still Images P Mode
 Movies
Tv, Av, and M Mode
You can lock the exposure before or during recording or adjust it in 1/3stop increments within a range of –2 to +2 stops.
1
Playback Mode
Lock the exposure.
Wi-Fi Functions
●● Press the [ ] button to lock the
exposure. The exposure shift bar is
displayed.
●● To unlock the exposure, press the [
button again.
Setting Menu
]
Accessories
Appendix
2 Adjust the exposure.
●● Turn the [ ] dial to adjust the exposure,
as you watch the screen.
Index
3 Shoot (= 66).
66
Disabling Auto Slow Shutter
 Still Images  Movies
Auto slow shutter can be disabled if movement in movies is rough.
However, under low light, movies may look dark.
●● Press the [
] button, choose
[ Auto slow shutter] on the [ ] tab,
and then choose [Disable] (= 29).
●● To restore the original setting, repeat this
process but choose [Enable].
●● [Dynamic IS] is not available when [IS Mode] is set to [Off]
(= 52).
], it is set to [Standard] and
●● When the movie quality is [
cannot be changed.
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Sound Settings
 Still Images Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
 Movies
Other Shooting Modes
Deactivating the Wind Filter
P Mode
Noise caused by strong wind can be reduced. However, the recording
may sound unnatural when this option is used when there is no wind. In
this case, you can deactivate the wind filter.
●● Press the [
Filter] on the [
[Off] (= 29).
●● Auto slow shutter is only available for [
Tv, Av, and M Mode
] button, choose [Wind
] tab, and then choose
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
] movies.
Setting Menu
Correcting Severe Camera Shake
 Still Images  Movies
Counteract severe camera shake, such as when recording while moving.
The portion of images displayed changes more than for [Standard], and
subjects are further enlarged.
●● Follow the steps in “Recording Movies
with Subjects at the Same Size Shown
before Recording” (= 53) to choose
[High].
Accessories
Using the Attenuator
The attenuator can reduce audio distortion in noisy environments.
However, in quiet environments, it lowers the sound-recording level.
●● Press the [
] button, choose
[Attenuator] on the [ ] tab, and then
choose the desired option (= 29).
Appendix
Index
67
Playback Effects
Recording Movies in Short Clip Mode
Still Images Movies
Apply playback effects to brief clips of a few seconds, such as fast motion,
slow motion, or replay. Clips recorded in this mode may be included in
Story Highlights albums (= 108).
1
Enter [
] mode.
●● Set the mode dial to [
].
●● Press the [ ] button, choose [ ] in the
menu, and then choose [ ] (= 28).
2x
Playback in fast motion
1x
Playback at normal speed
1/2x
Playback in slow motion
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Normal playback with the last two seconds fast-rewound
and played again in slow motion
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
●● Sound is not recorded in these clips.
] (= 50) and cannot be changed.
●● The movie quality is [
Other Shooting Modes
●● Black bars are displayed on the top
and bottom edges of the screen. They
indicate that this image area cannot be
recorded.
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M Mode
2 Specify the shooting time and
Playback Mode
playback effect.
●● Press the [
Wi-Fi Functions
] button.
●● Turn the [ ] dial to set the shooting time
(4 – 6 sec.), and press the [ ][ ] buttons
to set the following playback effects.
Setting Menu
Accessories
3 Shoot (= 66).
●● A bar showing the elapsed time is
displayed.
Appendix
Index
68
Before Use
Recording iFrame Movies
 Still Images  Movies
Record movies that can be edited with iFrame-compatible software or
devices.
1 Choose [
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
].
●● Set the mode dial to [
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
].
●● Press the [ ] button, choose [ ] in the
menu, and then choose [ ] (= 28).
Other Shooting Modes
●● Black bars are displayed on the top
and bottom edges of the screen. They
indicate that this image area cannot be
recorded.
2
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Shoot (= 66).
Playback Mode
●● iFrame is a video format developed by Apple Inc.
] (= 50) and cannot be changed.
●● The movie quality is [
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
69
Shooting in Program AE ([P] Mode)
 Still Images  Movies
You can customize many function settings to suit your preferred
shooting style.
P Mode
More discerning shots, in your preferred shooting style
1 Enter [
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
] mode.
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
●● Set the mode dial to [ ].
2 Customize the settings as desired
Other Shooting Modes
(= 71 – = 83), and then shoot.
P Mode
●● Instructions in this chapter apply to the camera with the mode dial set
to [ ] mode.
●● [ ]: Program AE; AE: Auto Exposure
●● Before using a function introduced in this chapter in modes other than
[ ], make sure the function is available in that mode (= 168).
Tv, Av, and M Mode
●● If the optimum exposure cannot be obtained when you press the
shutter button halfway, the shutter speed and aperture value are
displayed in orange. In this case, try adjusting the ISO speed
(= 72) or activating the flash (if subjects are dark, = 81),
which may enable optimum exposure.
●● Movies can be recorded in [ ] mode as well, by pressing the movie
button. However, some FUNC. (= 28) and MENU (= 29)
settings may be automatically adjusted for movie recording.
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
70
2 Compose the shot and shoot.
Image Brightness (Exposure)
Adjusting Image Brightness (Exposure
Compensation)
 Still Images ●● Press the [ ] button. As you watch
the screen, turn the [ ] dial to adjust
brightness, and then press the [ ] button
again when finished.
●● The correction level you specified is now
displayed.
] is
●● AE: Auto Exposure
●● After the exposure is locked, you can adjust the combination
of shutter speed and aperture value by turning the [ ] dial
(Program Shift).
 Movies
The standard exposure set by the camera can be adjusted in 1/3-stop
increments, in a range of –2 to +2.
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
Changing the Metering Method
 Still Images P Mode
 Movies
Adjust the metering method (how brightness is measured) to suit shooting
conditions as follows.
Tv, Av, and M Mode
●● Press the [ ] button, choose [ ] in the
menu, and choose the desired option
(= 2 8).
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
●● The option you configured is now
displayed.
Locking Image Brightness / Exposure (AE Lock)
 Still Images Before Use
●● After one shot, AE is unlocked and [
no longer displayed.
Setting Menu
 Movies
Before shooting, you can lock the exposure, or you can specify focus and
exposure separately.
1 Lock the exposure.
●● Aim the camera at the subject to shoot
with the exposure locked. With the
shutter button pressed halfway, press the
[ ] button.
●● [ ] is displayed, and the exposure is
locked.
Accessories
Evaluative
Center
Weighted
Avg.
Spot
For typical shooting conditions, including backlit
shots. Automatically adjusts exposure to match the
shooting conditions.
Determines the average brightness of light across
the entire image area, calculated by treating
brightness in the central area as more important.
Appendix
Index
Metering restricted to within the [ ] (Spot AE
Point frame), displayed in the center of the screen.
●● To unlock AE, release the shutter button
and press the [ ] button again. In this
case, [ ] is no longer displayed.
71
Changing the ISO Speed
Before Use
Correcting Image Brightness (i-Contrast)
 Still Images  Movies
Set the ISO speed to [AUTO] for automatic adjustment to suit the shooting
mode and conditions. Otherwise, set a higher value for higher sensitivity,
or a lower value for lower sensitivity.
●● Press the [ ] button, choose [ ] in the
menu, and choose the desired option
(= 28).
●● The option you configured is now
displayed.
●● To view the automatically determined ISO speed when you have
set the ISO speed to [AUTO], press the shutter button halfway.
●● Although choosing a lower ISO speed may reduce image
graininess, there may be a greater risk of subject and camera
shake in some shooting conditions.
●● Choosing a higher ISO speed will increase shutter speed, which
may reduce subject and camera shake and increase the flash
range. However, shots may look grainy.
 Still Images  Movies
Before shooting, excessively bright or dark image areas (such as faces or
backgrounds) can be detected and automatically adjusted to the optimal
brightness. Insufficient overall image contrast can also be automatically
corrected before shooting to make subjects stand out better.
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
●● Press the [
] button, choose
[i-Contrast] on the [ ] tab, and then
choose [Auto] (= 29).
●● Once the setting is complete, [
displayed.
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
] is
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M Mode
●● Under some shooting conditions, correction may be inaccurate or
may cause images to appear grainy.
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
●● You can also correct existing images (= 104).
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
72
Custom White Balance
Image Colors
Before Use
 Still Images For image colors that look natural under the light in your shot, adjust white
balance to suit the light source where you are shooting. Set the white
balance under the same light source that will illuminate your shot.
Capturing Natural Colors (White Balance)
 Still Images  Movies
 Movies
By adjusting white balance (WB), you can make image colors look more
natural for the scene you are shooting.
●● Press the [ ] button, choose [ ] in the
menu, and choose the desired option
(= 28).
●● The option you configured is now
displayed.
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
●● Follow the steps in “Capturing Natural
Colors (White Balance)” (= 73) to
choose [ ].
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
●● Aim the camera at a plain white subject,
so that the entire screen is white. Press
] button.
the [
Other Shooting Modes
●● The tint of the screen changes once the
white balance data has been recorded.
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M Mode
●● Colors may look unnatural if you change camera settings after
recording white balance data.
Playback Mode
Auto
Automatically sets the optimal white balance for
the shooting conditions.
Day Light
For shooting outdoors in fair weather.
Cloudy
For shooting in cloudy weather or at twilight.
Tungsten
For shooting under ordinary incandescent
lighting.
Accessories
Fluorescent
For shooting under white fluorescent lighting.
Fluorescent H
For shooting under daylight fluorescent lighting.
Appendix
Custom
For manually setting a custom white balance
(= 73).
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Index
73
Changing Image Color Tones (My Colors)
 Still Images  Movies
Change image color tones as desired, such as converting images to sepia
or black and white.
●● Press the [ ] button, choose [ ] in the
menu, and choose the desired option
(= 28).
●● The option you configured is now
displayed.
Before Use
●● White balance (= 73) cannot be set in [ ] or [ ] modes.
●● With [ ] and [ ] modes, colors other than people’s skin tone
may change. These settings may not produce the expected
results with some skin tones.
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Custom Color
Camera Basics
 Still Images  Movies
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Choose the desired level of image contrast, sharpness, color saturation,
red, green, blue, and skin tones in a range of 1 – 5.
Other Shooting Modes
1 Access the setting screen.
–
My Colors Off
Vivid
Neutral
Emphasizes contrast and color saturation,
making images sharper.
Tones down contrast and color saturation for
subdued images.
Sepia
Creates sepia tone images.
B/W
Creates black and white images.
Positive Film
Combines the effects of Vivid Blue, Vivid
Green, and Vivid Red to produce intense yet
natural-looking colors resembling images on
positive film.
Lighter Skin Tone
Lightens skin tones.
Darker Skin Tone
Darkens skin tones.
Vivid Blue
Vivid Green
Vivid Red
Custom Color
Emphasizes blues in images. Makes the sky,
ocean, and other blue subjects more vivid.
Emphasizes greens in images. Makes
mountains, foliage, and other green subjects
more vivid.
Emphasizes reds in images. Makes red
subjects more vivid.
Adjust contrast, sharpness, color saturation,
and other qualities as desired (= 74).
●● Follow the steps in “Changing Image
Color Tones (My Colors)” (= 74) to
choose [ ], and then press the [
button.
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M Mode
]
Playback Mode
2 Configure the setting.
Wi-Fi Functions
●● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose
an item, and then specify the value by
pressing the [ ][ ] buttons or turning the
[ ] dial.
●● For stronger/more intense effects (or
darker skin tones), adjust the value to
the right, and for weaker/lighter effects
(or lighter skin tones), adjust the value to
the left.
●● Press the [
setting.
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
] button to complete the
74
Before Use
Shooting in Manual Focus Mode
Shooting Range and Focusing
 Still Images Shooting Close-Ups (Macro)
 Still Images  Movies
To restrict the focus to subjects at close range, set the camera to [ ]. For
details on the range of focus, see “Shooting Range” (= 178).
 Movies
When focusing is not possible in AF mode, use manual focus. You can
specify the general focal position and then press the shutter button
halfway to have the camera determine the optimal focal position near the
position you specified. For details on the range of focus, see “Shooting
Range” (= 178).
1 Choose [
●● Press the [ ] button, choose [ ] (either
press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial), and then press the [ ] button.
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
].
Other Shooting Modes
●● Press the [ ] button, choose [
] (either
press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial), and then press the [ ] button.
●● Once the setting is complete, [ ] is
displayed.
●● [
P Mode
] and the MF indicator are displayed.
Tv, Av, and M Mode
2 Specify the general focal position.
●● If the flash fires, vignetting may occur.
●● When the zoom position is within the range of the yellow bar
below the zoom bar, [ ] turns gray and the camera cannot focus.
●● To prevent camera shake, try mounting the camera on a tripod
and shooting with the camera set to [ ] (= 42).
(1)
Playback Mode
●● Referring to the on-screen MF indicator
(1), which shows the distance and focal
position, and the magnified display, press
the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial
to specify the general focal position, and
then press the [ ] button.
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
●● To adjust the magnification, press the
] button.
[
3 Fine-tune the focus.
Appendix
Index
●● Press the shutter button halfway to have
the camera fine-tune the focal position
(Safety MF).
75
●● When you focus manually, the AF frame mode (= 77) is locked
to [Center] and AF frame size (= 77) is locked to [Normal].
●● Focusing is possible when using the digital zoom (= 38) or
digital tele-converter (= 77), or when using a TV as a display
(= 148), but the magnified display will not appear.
●● To focus more accurately, try attaching the camera to a tripod to
stabilize it.
●● You can enlarge or hide the magnified display area by adjusting
MENU (= 29) > [ ] tab > [MF-Point Zoom] settings.
●● To deactivate automatic focus fine-tuning when the shutter button
is pressed halfway, choose MENU (= 29) > [ ] tab > [Safety
MF] > [Off].
Easily Identifying the Focus Area (MF Peaking)
 Still Images Before Use
 Movies
Edges of subjects in focus are displayed in color to make manual focusing
easier. You can adjust the colors and the sensitivity (level) of edge
detection as needed.
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1 Access the setting screen.
Camera Basics
●● Press the [
] button, choose [MF
Peaking Settings] on the [ ] tab, and
then choose [On] (= 29).
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
2 Configure the setting.
Tv, Av, and M Mode
●● Choose a menu item to configure, and
then choose the desired option (= 29).
Playback Mode
●● Colors displayed for MF peaking are not recorded in your shots.
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
76
Center
Digital Tele-Converter
Before Use
 Still Images  Still Images  Movies
The focal length of the lens can be increased by approximately 1.6x or
2.0x. This can reduce camera shake because the shutter speed is faster
than it would be if you zoomed (including using digital zoom) in to the
same zoom factor.
●● Press the [
] button, choose
[Digital Zoom] on the [ ] tab, and then
choose the desired option (= 29).
●● The view is enlarged and the zoom factor
is displayed on the screen.
●● The shutter speed may be equivalent when you move the zoom
] for maximum telephoto, and when
lever all the way toward [
you zoom in to enlarge the subject to the same size following step
2 in “Zooming In Closer on Subjects (Digital Zoom)” (= 38).
Changing the AF Frame Mode
 Movies
One AF frame is displayed in the center. Effective for reliable focusing.
●● A yellow AF frame is displayed with [ ] if the camera cannot
focus when you press the shutter button halfway.
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
●● To reduce the AF frame size, press the [
] button and set
[AF Frame Size] on the [ ] tab to [Small] (= 29).
●● The AF frame size is set to [Normal] when you use the digital
zoom (= 38) or digital tele-converter (= 77), and in manual
focus mode (= 75).
●● To compose shots so that subjects are positioned at the edge or
in a corner, first aim the camera to capture the subject in an AF
frame, and then hold the shutter button halfway down. As you
continue to hold the shutter button halfway, recompose the shot
as desired, and then press the shutter button all the way down
(Focus Lock).
●● The AF frame position is enlarged when you press the shutter
button halfway with [AF-Point Zoom] (= 51) set to [On].
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Face AiAF
 Still Images  Movies
Change the AF (auto focus) frame mode to suit the shooting conditions as
follows.
●● Press the [
] button, choose [AF
Frame] on the [ ] tab, and then choose
the desired option (= 29).
Accessories
 Still Images  Movies
●● Detects people’s faces, and then sets the focus, exposure (evaluative
metering only), and white balance ([ ] only).
●● After you aim the camera at the subject, a white frame is displayed
around the person’s face determined by the camera to be the main
subject, and up to two gray frames are displayed around other
detected faces.
Appendix
Index
●● When the camera detects movement, frames will follow moving
subjects, within a certain range.
●● After you press the shutter button halfway, up to nine green frames are
displayed around faces in focus.
77
●● If faces are not detected, or when only gray frames are displayed
(without a white frame), up to nine green frames are displayed in
the areas in focus when you press the shutter button halfway.
●● If faces are not detected when Servo AF (= 79) is set to [On],
the AF frame is displayed in the center of the screen when you
press the shutter button halfway.
●● Examples of faces that cannot be detected:
-- Subjects that are distant or extremely close
-- Subjects that are dark or light
-- Faces in profile, at an angle, or partly hidden
●● The camera may misinterpret non-human subjects as faces.
●● No AF frames are displayed if the camera cannot focus when you
press the shutter button halfway.
Choosing Subjects to Focus On (Tracking AF)
 Still Images  Movies
Shoot after choosing a subject to focus on as follows.
1 Choose [Tracking AF].
●● Follow the steps in “Changing the
AF Frame Mode” (= 77) to choose
[Tracking AF].
●● [ ] is displayed in the center of the
screen.
2 Choose a subject to focus on.
●● Aim the camera so that [ ] is on the
desired subject, and then press the [ ]
button.
●● When the subject is detected, the camera
beeps and [ ] is displayed. Even if the
subject moves, the camera will continue
to track the subject within a certain range.
●● If no subject is detected, [
] is displayed.
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
●● To cancel tracking, press the [ ] button
again.
Camera Basics
3 Shoot.
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
●● Press the shutter button halfway. [ ]
changes to a blue [ ], which follows
the subject as the camera continues to
adjust the focus and exposure (Servo AF)
(= 79).
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
●● Press the shutter button all the way down
to shoot.
Tv, Av, and M Mode
●● Even after your shot, [ ] is still displayed
and the camera continues to track the
subject.
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
●● [Servo AF] (= 79) is set to [On] and cannot be changed.
●● Tracking may not be possible when subjects are too small or
move too rapidly, or when subject color or brightness matches
that of the background too closely.
●● [AF-Point Zoom] on the [ ] tab of MENU (= 29) is not
available.
●● [ ] is not available.
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
●● The camera can detect subjects even if you press the shutter
button halfway without pressing the [ ] button. After your shot,
[ ] is displayed in the center of the screen.
] mode (= 75), press and hold the [ ]
●● When shooting in [
button for at least one second.
●● If [Face ID] is set to [On], names will not display when registered
people are detected, but the names will be recorded in the still
images (= 44). However, the name is displayed when a
registered person is selected as a subject.
78
Shooting with Servo AF
 Still Images  Movies
This mode helps avoid missing shots of subjects in motion, because the
camera continues to focus on the subject and adjust the exposure as long
as you press the shutter button halfway.
1 Configure the setting.
●● Press the [
AF] on the [
(= 29).
] button, choose [Servo
] tab, and then choose [On]
 Still Images  Movies
You can change default camera operation of constantly focusing on
subjects it is aimed at, even when the shutter button is not pressed.
Instead, you can limit camera focusing to the moment you press the
shutter button halfway.
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
●● Press the [
] button, choose
[Continuous AF] on the [ ] tab, and then
choose [Off] (= 29).
2 Focus.
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
●● The focus and exposure are maintained
where the blue AF frame is displayed
while you are pressing the shutter button
halfway.
Tv, Av, and M Mode
On
●● Focusing may not be possible in some shooting conditions.
●● In low-light conditions, Servo AF may not be activated (AF frames
may not turn blue) when you press the shutter button halfway.
In this case, the focus and exposure are set according to the
specified AF frame mode.
●● If adequate exposure cannot be obtained, the shutter speed
and aperture value are displayed in orange. Release the shutter
button, and then press it halfway again.
●● AF lock shooting is not available.
●● [AF-Point Zoom] on the [ ] tab (= 29) is not available.
●● Not available when using the self-timer (= 42).
Before Use
Changing the Focus Setting
Off
Helps avoid missing sudden photo opportunities, because
the camera constantly focuses on subjects until you press the
shutter button halfway.
Conserves battery power, because the camera does not focus
constantly.
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
79
Shooting with the AF Lock
 Still Images  Movies
The focus can be locked. After you lock the focus, the focal position will
not change even when you release your finger from the shutter button.
1 Lock the focus.
●● With the shutter button pressed halfway,
press the [ ] button.
●● The focus is now locked, and [
the MF indicator are displayed.
] and
●● To unlock the focus, after you release the
shutter button, press the [ ] button again
and choose [ ] (either press the [ ][ ]
buttons or turn the [ ] dial).
2 Compose the shot and shoot.
Shooting Continuously as the Camera Keeps the
Subject in Focus
 Still Images  Movies
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Shoot continuously as the camera keeps the subject in focus. For details
on the continuous shooting speed, see “Camera” (= 177).
Camera Basics
1 Configure the setting.
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
●● Press the [ ] button, choose [ ] in the
menu, and then choose [ ] (= 28).
●● Once the setting is complete, [
displayed.
Other Shooting Modes
] is
P Mode
2 Shoot.
Tv, Av, and M Mode
●● Hold the shutter button all the way down
to shoot continuously.
Playback Mode
●● The images are managed together as a
group (= 92).
Wi-Fi Functions
●● In [ ] mode (= 59), manual focus mode (= 75), or when
AF is locked (= 80), [ ] is changed to [ ].
●● Cannot be used with the self-timer (= 42).
●● Shooting may stop momentarily or continuous shooting may slow
down depending on shooting conditions, camera settings, and the
zoom position.
●● As more shots are taken, shooting may slow down.
●● Shooting may slow down if the flash fires.
●● Continuous shooting is not available in [ ] Auto mode (= 40),
even if you choose [ ].
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
80
Slow Synchro
Flash
Fires to illuminate the main subject (such as people) while shooting at a
slower shutter speed to illuminate backgrounds out of flash range.
Changing the Flash Mode
 Still Images ●● In [ ] mode, mount the camera on a tripod or take other
measures to keep it still and prevent camera shake. Additionally,
you should set [IS Mode] to [Off] when using a tripod or other
means to secure the camera (= 83).
●● In [ ] mode, even after the flash fires, ensure that the main
subject does not move until the shutter sound is finished playing.
 Movies
You can change the flash mode to match the shooting scene. For details
on the flash range, see “Camera” (= 177).
1 Raise the flash.
●● Move the [ ] switch.
2
Configure the setting.
●● Press the [ ] button, choose a flash
mode (either press the [ ][ ] buttons or
turn the [ ] dial), and then press the [ ]
button.
●● The option you configured is now
displayed.
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
Off
P Mode
For shooting without the flash.
Tv, Av, and M Mode
●● A blinking [ ] icon may be displayed when you press the shutter
button halfway in camera-shake inducing, low-light conditions. In
this case, mount the camera on a tripod or take other measures
to keep it still.
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
●● The setting screen cannot be accessed by pressing the [ ] button
when the flash is lowered. Move the [ ] switch to raise the flash,
then configure the setting.
Auto
Appendix
Index
Fires automatically in low-light conditions.
On
Fires for each shot.
81
Adjusting the Flash Exposure Compensation
 Still Images Before Use
Shooting with the FE Lock
 Movies
Just as with regular exposure compensation (= 71), you can adjust the
flash exposure from –2 to +2 stops, in 1/3-stop increments.
●● Press the [ ] button, choose [ ] in the
menu, and adjust the setting by either
pressing the [ ][ ] buttons or turning
the [ ] dial (= 28).
●● The correction level you specified is now
displayed.
●● When there is a risk of overexposure, the camera automatically
adjusts the shutter speed or aperture value for flash shots to
reduce washed-out highlights and shoot at optimal exposure.
However, you can deactivate automatic adjustment of the shutter
speed and aperture value by accessing MENU (= 29) and
choosing [ ] tab > [Flash Settings] > [Safety FE] > [Off].
●● You can also configure the flash exposure compensation by
accessing MENU (= 29) and choosing [ ] tab > [Flash
Settings] > [Flash Exp. Comp].
●● You can also access the [Flash Settings] screen (= 29)
when the flash is up by pressing the [ ] button and immediately
] button.
pressing the [
 Still Images  Movies
Just as with the AE lock (= 71), you can lock the exposure for flash shots.
1 Raise the flash and set it to [
(= 81).
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
]
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
2 Lock the flash exposure.
●● Aim the camera at the subject to shoot
with the exposure locked. With the
shutter button pressed halfway, press the
[ ] button.
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
●● The flash fires, and when [ ] is displayed,
the flash output level is retained.
Tv, Av, and M Mode
●● To unlock the focus, release the shutter
button and press the [ ] button again. In
this case, [ ] is no longer displayed.
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
3 Compose the shot and shoot.
●● After one shot, AE is unlocked and [
no longer displayed.
Setting Menu
] is
Accessories
●● FE: Flash Exposure
Appendix
Index
82
Other Settings
Changing the Compression Ratio (Image Quality)
 Still Images ●● If image stabilization cannot prevent camera shake, mount the
camera on a tripod or take other measures to hold it still. In this
case, set [IS Mode] to [Off].
●● The setting is changed to [Continuous] for movie recording.
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
 Movies
You can choose from two compression ratios. These are [ ] (Super Fine)
and [ ] (Fine). For guidelines on how many shots at each compression
ratio can fit on a memory card, see “Number of Shots per Memory Card”
(= 179).
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
●● Press the [ ] button, choose [ ] in the
menu, and choose the desired option
(= 28).
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Changing the IS Mode Settings
Setting Menu
 Still Images  Movies
Accessories
You can keep image stabilization off until the moment you shoot.
●● Choose [Shoot Only] by following steps
1 – 2 in “Deactivating Image Stabilization”
(= 52).
Appendix
Index
83
Specific Shutter Speeds ([Tv] Mode)
 Still Images Tv, Av, and M mode
 Movies
Set your preferred shutter speed before shooting as follows. The camera
automatically adjusts the aperture value to suit your shutter speed.
For details on available shutter speeds, see “Camera” (= 177).
1
Enter [
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
] mode.
●● Set the mode dial to [
Take smarter, more sophisticated shots, and customize the camera for
your shooting style
Before Use
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
].
2 Set the shutter speed.
●● Turn the [
Other Shooting Modes
] dial to set the shutter speed.
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Playback Mode
●● Instructions in this chapter apply to the camera as set to the respective
mode.
●● In conditions requiring slower shutter speeds, there may be a
delay before you can shoot again, as the camera processes
images to reduce noise.
●● When shooting at low shutter speeds on a tripod, you should set
[IS Mode] to [Off] (= 83).
●● Maximum shutter speed with the flash is 1/2000 second. If you
specify a faster speed, the camera will automatically reset the
speed to 1/2000 second before shooting.
●● With shutter speed of 1.3 seconds or slower, ISO speed is fixed
at [80].
●● Orange display of the aperture value when you press the shutter
button halfway indicates that the optimum exposure has not been
obtained. Adjust the shutter speed until the aperture value is
displayed in white, or use safety shift (= 85).
●● [
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
]: Time value
84
Specific Aperture Values ([Av] Mode)
 Still Images  Movies
Set your preferred aperture value before shooting as follows. The camera
automatically adjusts the shutter speed to suit your aperture value.
For details on available aperture values, see “Camera” (= 177).
1 Enter [
] mode.
●● Set the mode dial to [
].
 Still Images Basic Guide
 Movies
Advanced Guide
Follow these steps before shooting to set your preferred shutter speed
and aperture value to obtain the desired exposure.
For details on available shutter speeds and aperture values, see “Camera”
(= 177).
1 Enter [
2 Set the aperture value.
●● Turn the [
value.
Before Use
Specific Shutter Speeds and
Aperture Values ([M] Mode)
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
] mode.
●● Set the mode dial to [
] dial to set the aperture
Camera Basics
Other Shooting Modes
].
P Mode
2 Configure the setting.
Tv, Av, and M Mode
●● Press the [ ] button to choose shutter
speed (1) or aperture value (2), and turn
the [ ] dial to specify a value.
●● Orange display of the shutter speed when you press the shutter
button halfway indicates that the optimum exposure has not been
obtained. Adjust the aperture value until the shutter speed is
displayed in white, or use safety shift (see below).
●● [
]: Aperture value (size of the opening made by the
diaphragm in the lens)
] and [
] modes, press the [
] button and
●● In [
set [Safety Shift] on the [ ] tab to [On] (= 29) to have the
camera automatically adjust the shutter speed and aperture value
when there are exposure problems, so that you can shoot at the
optimum exposure.
However, safety shift is disabled when the flash fires.
(1) (2)
(3)
(4)
Playback Mode
●● An exposure level mark (4) based on
your specified value is shown on the
exposure level indicator for comparison to
the standard exposure level (3).
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
●● The exposure level mark is shown in
orange when the difference from standard
exposure exceeds 2 stops.
Accessories
Appendix
Index
85
●● After you set the shutter speed and aperture value, the exposure
level may change if you adjust the zoom or recompose the shot.
●● Screen brightness may change depending on your specified
shutter speed and aperture value. However, screen brightness
remains the same when the flash is up and the mode is set to [ ].
●● To have the setting that is not chosen in step 2 (whether shutter
speed or aperture value) automatically adjusted to obtain
standard exposure, hold the shutter button halfway and press the
[ ] button. Note that standard exposure may not be possible with
some settings.
●● With shutter speed of 1.3 seconds or slower, ISO speed is fixed
at [80].
●● [ ] Auto mode cannot be used in [ ] mode.
●● [ ]: Manual
●● Calculation of standard exposure is based on the specified
metering method (= 71).
Before Use
Adjusting the Flash Output
 Still Images Choose from the three flash levels in [
1 Enter [
 Movies
] mode.
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
] mode.
●● Set the mode dial to [
Camera Basics
].
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
2 Configure the setting.
●● Press the [ ] button, choose [ ] in the
menu, and adjust the setting by either
pressing the [ ][ ] buttons or turning
the [ ] dial (= 28).
Other Shooting Modes
●● Once the setting is complete, the flash
output level is displayed.
]: Minimum, [
]: Medium, [
]:
[
Maximum
Tv, Av, and M Mode
●● You can also set the flash level by accessing MENU (= 29)
and choosing [ ] tab > [Flash Settings] > [Flash Output].
] or [
] mode by accessing
●● You can set the flash level in [
MENU (= 29) and choosing [ ] tab > [Flash Settings] >
[Flash Mode] > [Manual].
●● You can also access the [Flash Settings] screen (= 29)
when the flash is up by pressing the [ ] button and immediately
] button.
pressing the [
P Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
86
Before Use
Viewing
 Still Images  Movies
After shooting images or movies, you can view them on the screen as
follows.
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
1 Enter Playback mode.
Playback Mode
●● Press the [
Have fun reviewing your shots, and browse or edit them in many ways
●● To prepare the camera for these operations, press the [
enter Playback mode.
Basic Guide
] button to
●● It may not be possible to play back or edit images that were
renamed or already edited on a computer, or images from other
cameras.
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
] button.
●● Your last shot is displayed.
2
Other Shooting Modes
Choose images.
P Mode
●● To view the previous image, press
the [ ] button or turn the [ ] dial
counterclockwise. To view the next
image, press the [ ] button or turn the
[ ] dial clockwise.
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Playback Mode
●● Press and hold the [ ][ ] buttons to
browse through images quickly.
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
●● To access this screen (Scroll Display
mode), turn the [ ] dial rapidly. In this
mode, turn the [ ] dial to browse through
images.
Appendix
Index
●● To return to single-image display, press
the [ ] button.
●● To browse images grouped by shooting
date, press the [ ][ ] buttons in Scroll
Display mode.
87
●● Movies are identified by a [
To play movies, go to step 3.
] icon.
Before Use
Switching Display Modes
 Still Images  Movies
Press the [
] button to view other information on the screen, or
to hide the information. For details on the information displayed, see
“Playback (Detailed Information Display)” (= 167).
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
3 Play movies.
●● To start playback, press the [ ] button,
choose [ ] (either press the [ ][ ]
buttons or turn the [ ] dial), and then
press the [ ] button again.
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
No Information Display
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
4 Adjust the volume.
●● Press the [
volume.
][
Tv, Av, and M Mode
] buttons to adjust the
●● To adjust the volume when the volume
indicator (1) is no longer displayed, press
the [ ][ ] buttons.
(1)
5
Playback Mode
Simple Information Display
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Pause playback.
●● To pause or resume playback, press the
[ ] button.
●● After the movie is finished, [
displayed.
] is
●● To switch to Shooting mode from Playback mode, press the shutter
button halfway.
] tab >
●● To deactivate Scroll Display, choose MENU (= 29) > [
[Scroll Display] > [Off].
●● To have the most recent shot displayed when you enter Playback
] tab > [Resume] > [Last shot].
mode, choose MENU (= 29) > [
●● To change the transition shown between images, access MENU
] tab >
(= 29) and choose your desired effect on the [
[Transition Effect].
Accessories
Detailed Information Display
Appendix
Index
GPS Information Display
88
Overexposure Warning (for Image Highlights)
 Still Images  Movies
Washed-out highlights in the image flash on the screen in detailed
information display (= 88).
Histogram
 Still Images  Movies
●● The graph in detailed information display
(= 88) is a histogram showing the
distribution of brightness in the image.
The horizontal axis represents the degree
of brightness, and the vertical axis, how
much of the image is at each level of
brightness. Viewing the histogram is a
way to check exposure.
Before Use
●● UTC: Coordinated Universal Time, essentially the same as
Greenwich Mean Time
Basic Guide
Viewing Short Movies Recorded in Creative Shot
Mode (Creative Shot Movies)
 Still Images Play back Creative Shot movies recorded in [
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
 Movies
] mode (= 57).
Other Shooting Modes
1 Choose a movie.
P Mode
●● Press the [
] button and choose
[Play Creative Shot Movies] on the [
]
tab (= 29).
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Playback Mode
GPS Information Display
 Still Images  Movies
●● Using a smartphone connected to the
camera via Wi-Fi, you can geotag images
on the camera, adding information such
as latitude, longitude, and elevation
(= 135). You can review this information
in the GPS information display.
●● Latitude, longitude, elevation, and UTC
(shooting date and time) are listed from
top to bottom.
2 Play the movie.
●● Select a movie and press the [
to play it.
Wi-Fi Functions
] button
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
●● GPS information display is not available for images that lack this
information.
●● [---] is shown instead of numerical values for items not available
on your smartphone or items not recorded correctly.
89
Viewing by Date
Viewing Short Movies Created When Shooting
Still Images (Digest Movies)
 Still Images View digest movies recorded automatically in [
day of still image shooting as follows.
Before Use
Digest movies can be viewed by date.
 Movies
] mode (= 34) on a
Basic Guide
1 Choose a movie.
●● Press the [
] button, choose [List/
Play Digest Movies] on the [
] tab, and
then choose a date (= 29).
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
1 Choose an image.
●● Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose a still image labeled with
[
].
2 Play the digest movie.
●● Press the [ ] button, and then choose
[ ] in the menu (= 28).
●● The digest movie recorded automatically
on the day of still image shooting is
played back, from the beginning.
●● After a moment, [
] will no longer be displayed when
you are using the camera with information display deactivated
(= 88).
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
2 Play the movie.
●● Press the [
Other Shooting Modes
] button to start playback.
P Mode
Checking People Detected in Face ID
 Still Images Tv, Av, and M Mode
 Movies
Playback Mode
If you switch the camera to simple information display mode (= 88),
the names of up to five detected people registered in Face ID (= 44)
will be displayed.
Wi-Fi Functions
] button several
●● Press the [
times until simple information display
is activated, and then press the [ ][ ]
buttons or turn the [ ] dial to choose an
image.
●● Names will be displayed on detected
people.
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
●● If you prefer not to have names displayed on images shot using
] tab > [Face ID Info] >
Face ID, choose MENU (= 29) > [
[Name Display] > [Off].
90
 Still Images Navigating through Images in an Index
 Still Images  Movies
By displaying multiple images in an index, you can quickly find the images
you are looking for.
1 Display images in an index.
●● Move the zoom lever toward [ ] to
display images in an index. Moving the
lever again will increase the number of
images shown.
●● To display fewer images, move the zoom
lever toward [ ]. Fewer images are
shown each time you move the lever.
2 Choose an image.
●● Turn the [
images.
●● Press the [
an image.
] dial to scroll through the
][
Before Use
Finding Images Matching Specified Conditions
Browsing and Filtering Images
][ ][ ] buttons to choose
●● An orange frame is displayed around the
selected image.
●● Press the [ ] button to view the selected
image in single-image display.
●● To deactivate the 3D display effect (shown if you hold down the
[ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial rapidly), choose MENU
] tab > [Index Effect] > [Off].
(= 29) > [
 Movies
Find desired images quickly on a memory card full of images by filtering
image display according to your specified conditions. You can also protect
(= 96) or delete (= 98) these images all at once.
Name
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Displays images of a registered person (= 45).
People
Displays images with detected faces.
Shot Date
Displays the images shot on a specific date.
Favorites
Displays images tagged as favorites (= 101).
Displays still images, movies, or movies shot in
[ ] mode (= 34).
Still image/Movie
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M Mode
1 Choose a search condition.
Playback Mode
●● Press the [ ] button, choose [ ] in the
menu, and choose a condition (= 28).
Wi-Fi Functions
●● When you have selected [ ], [ ], or
[ ], choose the condition by pressing
the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons on the screen
displayed, and then press the [ ] button.
Setting Menu
Accessories
2 View the filtered images.
●● Images matching your conditions are
displayed in yellow frames. To view only
these images, press the [ ][ ] buttons, or
turn the [ ] dial.
●● To cancel filtered display, choose [
step 1.
Appendix
Index
] in
●● When the camera has found no corresponding images for some
conditions, those conditions will not be available.
91
●● To hide or view other information, press the [
] button in
step 2.
●● Options for viewing the images found (in step 2) include
“Navigating through Images in an Index” (= 91), “Magnifying
Images” (= 94), and “Viewing Slideshows” (= 94). You can
also apply image operations to all images found, by choosing
[Protect All Images in Search] in “Protecting Images” (= 96) or
[Select All Images in Search] in “Erasing Multiple Images at Once”
(= 98), “Adding Images to the Print List (DPOF)” (= 156), or
“Adding Images to a Photobook” (= 158).
●● If you edit images and save them as new images (= 102 –
= 106), a message is displayed, and the images that were
found are no longer shown.
Viewing Individual Images in a Group
 Still Images  Movies
Images shot consecutively (= 43, = 58, = 80) or in [
] mode
(= 57) are displayed as a group but can also be viewed individually.
1 Choose a grouped image.
●● Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose an image labeled with
[
].
3 View images in the group
Before Use
individually.
●● Pressing the [ ][ ] buttons or turning the
[ ] dial will display only images in the
group.
●● To cancel group playback, press the [
button, choose [ ] in the menu, and
press the [ ] button again (= 28).
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
]
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
●● During group playback (step 3), you can browse through images
quickly “Navigating through Images in an Index” (= 91) and
magnify them “Magnifying Images” (= 94). You can apply your
actions to all images in the group at once by choosing [Protect All
Images in Group] in “Protecting Images” (= 96), [All images in
Group] in “Erasing Multiple Images at Once” (= 98), [Select All
in Group] in “Adding Images to the Print List (DPOF)” (= 156),
or [Select All in Group] in “Adding Images to a Photobook”
(= 158).
●● To ungroup images so that they are displayed only as single still
] tab > [Group Images] >
images, choose MENU (= 29) > [
[Off]. However, grouped images cannot be ungrouped during
individual playback.
] mode, the simultaneous display after step 2 in “Enjoying
●● In [
a Variety of Images from Each Shot” (= 57) is only shown
immediately after you shoot.
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
2 Choose [
].
●● Press the [ ] button, and then choose
[ ] in the menu (= 28).
92
3 Choose the editing option.
Editing Face ID Information
●● Press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons or turn
the [ ] dial to choose [Overwrite], and
then press the [ ] button.
If you notice that a name is incorrect during playback, you can change it
or erase it.
However, you cannot add names for people who are not detected by
Face ID (names are not displayed), and for people whose names have
been erased.
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
4 Choose the name of the person to
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
overwrite with.
Changing Names
●● Follow step 2 in “Overwriting and Adding
Face Information” (= 47) to choose
the name of the person you want to
overwrite with.
1 Access the setting screen.
●● Press the [
] button and choose
[Face ID Info] on the [
] tab (= 29).
●● Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [
dial to choose [Edit ID Info], and then
press the [ ] button.
]
2 Choose an image.
●● Following the procedure in “Checking
People Detected in Face ID” (= 90),
choose an image and press the [ ]
button.
●● An orange frame is displayed around the
selected face. When multiple names are
displayed in an image, press the [ ][ ]
buttons or turn the [ ] dial to choose
the name to change, and then press the
[ ] button.
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Erasing Names
Playback Mode
●● On the screen displayed in step 3 in
“Changing Names” (= 93), choose
[Erase] and press the [ ] button.
Wi-Fi Functions
●● After [Erase?] is displayed, press the
[ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial
to choose [OK], and then press the
[ ] button.
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
93
Before Use
Viewing Slideshows
Image Viewing Options
 Still Images Automatically play back images from a memory card as follows. Each
image is displayed for about three seconds.
Magnifying Images
 Still Images  Movies
1 Magnify an image.
●● Moving the zoom lever toward [ ] will
zoom in and magnify the image. You
can magnify images up to about 10x by
continuing to hold the zoom lever.
●● The approximate position of the displayed
area (1) is shown for reference.
●● To zoom out, move the zoom lever
toward [ ]. You can return to singleimage display by continuing to hold it.
(1)
 Movies
2 Move the display position and
switch images as needed.
●● To move the display position, press the
[ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons.
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
●● Press the [ ] button, choose [ ] in the
menu, and choose the desired option
(= 28).
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
●● The slideshow will start after [Loading
image] is displayed for a few seconds.
●● Press the [
slideshow.
Other Shooting Modes
] button to stop the
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M Mode
●● The camera’s power-saving functions (= 26) are deactivated
during slideshows.
Playback Mode
●● To pause or resume slideshows, press the [ ] button.
●● You can switch to other images during playback by pressing the
[ ][ ] buttons or turning the [ ] dial. For fast-forward or fastrewind, hold the [ ][ ] buttons down.
●● In filtered display (= 91), only images matching search
conditions are played.
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
●● To switch to other images while zoomed,
turn the [ ] dial.
Appendix
Index
●● You can return to single-image display from magnified display by
] button.
pressing the [
94
Changing Slideshow Settings
You can set up slideshows to repeat, and you can change the transitions
between images and the display duration of each image.
1 Access the setting screen.
●● Press the [
] button, and then
choose [Slideshow] on the [
] tab
(= 29).
2 Configure the settings.
●● Choose a menu item to configure, and
then choose the desired option (= 29).
●● To start the slideshow with your settings,
choose [Start] and press the [ ] button.
●● To return to the menu screen, press the
] button.
[
Auto Playback of Related Images (Smart Shuffle)
 Still Images  Movies
Based on the current image, the camera offers four images that you may
wish to view. After you choose to view one of those images, the camera
offers four more images. This is an enjoyable way to play back images in
an unexpected order. Try this feature after you have taken many shots, in
many kinds of scenes.
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
1 Choose Smart Shuffle.
Other Shooting Modes
●● Press the [ ] button, and then choose
[ ] in the menu (= 28).
P Mode
●● Four candidate images are displayed.
Tv, Av, and M Mode
2 Choose an image.
Playback Mode
●● Press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons to choose
the image you want to view next.
Wi-Fi Functions
●● Your chosen image is displayed in the
center, surrounded by the next four
candidate images.
Setting Menu
Accessories
●● For full-screen display of the center image,
press the [ ] button. To restore the original
display, press the [ ] button again.
] button to restore
●● Press the [
single-image display.
Appendix
Index
●● Smart Shuffle is not available in the following cases:
-- There are less than 50 shots taken with this camera
-- An unsupported image is currently displayed
-- Images are shown in filtered display (= 91)
-- During group playback (= 92)
95
2 Choose a selection method.
Protecting Images
●● Choose an option as desired (= 29).
 Still Images  Movies
Protect important images to prevent accidental erasure (= 98).
●● Press the [ ] button, and then choose
[
] in the menu (= 28). [Protected]
is displayed.
●● To cancel protection, repeat this process
] again, and then press
and choose [
the [ ] button.
●● Protected images on a memory card will be erased if you format
the card (= 142).
●● To return to the menu screen, press the
] button.
[
Using the Menu
1 Access the setting screen.
●● Press the [
] button and choose
[Protect] on the [
] tab (= 29).
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Choosing Images Individually
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
1 Choose [Select].
●● Following step 2 in “Using the Menu”
(= 96), choose [Select] and press the
[ ] button.
2
●● Protected images cannot be erased using the camera’s erasure
function. To erase them this way, first cancel protection.
Before Use
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Choose an image.
Playback Mode
●● Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose an image, and then press
the [ ] button. [ ] is displayed.
Wi-Fi Functions
●● To cancel selection, press the [ ] button
again. [ ] is no longer displayed.
Setting Menu
●● Repeat this process to specify other
images.
Accessories
Appendix
3 Protect the image.
●● Press the [
] button. A confirmation
message is displayed.
Index
●● Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [OK], and then press the
[ ] button.
●● Images will not be protected if you switch to Shooting mode or
turn the camera off before finishing the setup process in step 3.
96
4 Protect the images.
Selecting a Range
1 Choose [Select Range].
●● Press the [ ] button to choose [Protect],
and then press the [ ] button.
●● Press the [
] button.
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
●● Following step 2 in “Using the Menu”
(= 96), choose [Select Range] and
press the [ ] button.
2 Choose a starting image.
Before Use
Camera Basics
●● You can also choose the first or last image by turning the [ ] dial
when the top screen in steps 2 and 3 is displayed.
●● To cancel protection for groups of images, choose [Unlock] in
step 4.
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Protecting All Images at Once
●● Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose an image, and then press
the [ ] button.
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Playback Mode
1 Choose [Protect All Images].
Wi-Fi Functions
●● Following step 2 in “Using the Menu”
(= 96), choose [Protect All Images]
and press the [ ] button.
3 Choose an ending image.
●● Press the [ ] button to choose [Last
image], and then press the [ ] button.
Setting Menu
2 Protect the images.
Accessories
●● Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [OK], and then press the
[ ] button.
Appendix
Index
●● Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose an image, and then press
the [ ] button.
●● Images before the first image cannot be
selected as the last image.
Clearing All Protection at Once
You can clear protection from all images at once.
To clear protection, choose [Unprotect All Images] in step 1 of “Protecting
All Images at Once”, and then complete step 2.
97
Erasing Multiple Images at Once
Erasing Images
 Still Images  Movies
You can choose and erase unneeded images one by one. Be careful
when erasing images, because they cannot be recovered. However,
protected images (= 96) cannot be erased.
]
2 Erase the image.
●● Press the [
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Choosing a Selection Method
1 Choose an image to erase.
●● Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [
dial to choose an image.
You can choose multiple images to erase at once. Be careful when
erasing images, because they cannot be recovered. However, protected
images (= 96) cannot be erased.
Before Use
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
1 Access the setting screen.
●● Press the [
] button, and then
choose [Erase] on the [
] tab (= 29).
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
] button.
●● After [Erase?] is displayed, press the
[ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial to
choose [Erase], and then press the
[ ] button.
●● The current image is now erased.
●● To cancel erasure, press the [ ][ ]
buttons or turn the [ ] dial to choose
[Cancel], and then press the [ ] button.
Tv, Av, and M Mode
2
Choose a selection method.
Playback Mode
●● Choose an option as desired (= 29).
●● To return to the menu screen, press the
] button.
[
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
98
Choosing Images Individually
1 Choose [Select].
●● Following step 2 in “Choosing a Selection
Method” (= 98), choose [Select] and
press the [ ] button.
2 Choose an image.
●● Once you choose an image following
step 2 in “Choosing Images Individually”
(= 96), [ ] is displayed.
●● To cancel selection, press the [ ] button
again. [ ] is no longer displayed.
●● Repeat this process to specify other
images.
Selecting a Range
Before Use
1 Choose [Select Range].
●● Following step 2 in “Choosing a Selection
Method” (= 98), choose [Select
Range] and press the [ ] button.
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
2 Choose images.
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
●● Follow steps 2 – 3 in “Selecting a Range”
(= 97) to specify images.
Other Shooting Modes
3 Erase the images.
P Mode
●● Press the [ ] button to choose [Erase],
and then press the [ ] button.
Tv, Av, and M Mode
3 Erase the image.
●● Press the [
] button. A confirmation
message is displayed.
●● Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [OK], and then press the
[ ] button.
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Specifying All Images at Once
Setting Menu
1 Choose [Select All Images].
●● Following step 2 in “Choosing a Selection
Method” (= 98), choose [Select All
Images] and press the [ ] button.
2 Erase the images.
●● Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [OK], and then press the
[ ] button.
Accessories
Appendix
Index
99
2 Rotate the image.
Rotating Images
 Still Images  Movies
Change the orientation of images and save them as follows.
1 Choose [
].
●● Press the [ ] button, and then choose
[ ] in the menu (= 28).
2 Rotate the image.
●● Press the [ ] or [ ] button, depending
on the desired direction. Each time you
press the button, the image is rotated
90°. Press the [ ] button to complete the
setting.
●● Rotation is not possible when [Auto Rotate] is set to [Off]
(= 100).
Using the Menu
●● Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [
dial to choose an image.
Before Use
]
●● The image is rotated 90° each time you
press the [ ] button.
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
●● To return to the menu screen, press the
] button.
[
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Deactivating Auto Rotation
Other Shooting Modes
Follow these steps to deactivate automatic image rotation, which rotates
images based on the current camera orientation.
●● Press the [
Rotate] on the [
[Off] (= 29).
P Mode
] button, choose [Auto
] tab, and then choose
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
●● Images cannot be rotated (= 100) when you set [Auto Rotate]
to [Off]. Additionally, images already rotated will be displayed in
the original orientation.
●● In Smart Shuffle (= 95) mode, even if [Auto Rotate] is set
to [Off], images shot vertically will be displayed vertically, and
rotated images will be displayed in the rotated orientation.
Accessories
Appendix
Index
1 Choose [Rotate].
●● Press the [
[Rotate] on the [
] button and choose
] tab (= 29).
100
 Still Images Before Use
Using the Menu
Tagging Images as Favorites
 Movies
You can organize images by tagging them as favorites. By choosing a
category in filtered playback, you can restrict the following operations to
all of those images.
●● “Viewing” (= 87), “Viewing Slideshows” (= 94), “Protecting
Images” (= 96), “Erasing Images” (= 98), “Adding Images to
the Print List (DPOF)” (= 156), “Adding Images to a Photobook”
(= 158)
●● Press the [ ] button, and then choose
[ ] in the menu (= 28).
●● [Tagged as Favorite] is displayed.
●● To untag the image, repeat this process
and choose [ ] again, and then press
the [ ] button.
Basic Guide
1 Choose [Favorites].
●● Press the [
] button and choose
[Favorites] on the [
] tab (= 29).
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
2 Choose an image.
Other Shooting Modes
●● Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose an image, and then press
the [ ] button. [ ] is displayed.
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M Mode
●● To untag the image, press the [ ] button
again. [ ] is no longer displayed.
Playback Mode
●● Repeat this process to choose additional
images.
Wi-Fi Functions
3 Finish the setup process.
Setting Menu
●● Press the [
] button. A confirmation
message is displayed.
Accessories
●● Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [OK], and then press the
[ ] button.
Appendix
Index
●● Images will not be tagged as favorites if you switch to Shooting
mode or turn the camera off before finishing the setup process in
step 3.
●● Tagging images as favorites makes it easier to add them when
creating albums (= 108).
101
4 Save the new image.
Editing Still Images
●● Image editing (= 102 – = 104) is only available when the
memory card has sufficient free space.
Before Use
●● Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [OK], and then press the
[ ] button.
Basic Guide
●● The image is now saved as a new file.
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
5 Review the new image.
Resizing Images
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
●● Press the [
] button. [Display new
image?] is displayed.
 Still Images Save a copy of images at a lower resolution.
1 Choose [Resize].
●● Press the [
] button and choose
[Resize] on the [
] tab (= 29).
Other Shooting Modes
●● Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [Yes], and then press the
[ ] button.
 Movies
P Mode
●● The saved image is now displayed.
Tv, Av, and M Mode
●● Editing is not possible for images shot at a resolution (= 49)
of [ ].
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
2 Choose an image.
●● Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose an image, and then press
the [ ] button.
3 Choose an image size.
●● Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose the size, and then press
the [ ] button.
●● [Save new image?] is displayed.
●● Images cannot be resized to a higher resolution.
Setting Menu
Accessories
Cropping
 Still Images Appendix
 Movies
You can specify a portion of an image to save as a separate image file.
Index
1 Choose [Cropping].
●● Press the [
] button, and then
choose [Cropping] on the [
] tab
(= 29).
102
2 Choose an image.
●● Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose an image, and then press
the [ ] button.
(1)
(2)
(3)
3 Adjust the cropping area.
●● A frame is displayed around the portion of
the image to be cropped (1).
●● The original image is shown in the upper
left, and a preview of the image as
cropped (2) is shown in the lower right.
You can also see the resolution after
cropping (3).
●● To resize the frame, move the zoom
lever.
●● To move the frame, press the
[ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons.
●● To change the frame orientation, press
] button.
the [
●● Faces detected in the image are
enclosed in gray frames in the upper-left
image. Turn the [ ] dial to switch frames,
which position the cropping area.
●● Press the [
] button.
4 Save as a new image and review.
●● Follow steps 4 – 5 in “Resizing Images”
(= 102).
●● Editing is not possible for images shot at a resolution of [ ]
(= 49) or for resized [ ] images (= 102).
●● Images supported for cropping will have the same aspect ratio
after cropping.
●● Cropped images will have a lower resolution than uncropped
images.
●● If you crop still images shot using Face ID (= 44), only the
names of the people left in the cropped image will remain.
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Changing Image Color Tones (My Colors)
 Still Images Other Shooting Modes
 Movies
You can adjust image colors and then save the edited image as a
separate file. For details on each option, see “Changing Image Color
Tones (My Colors)” (= 74).
1
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Choose [My Colors].
Playback Mode
●● Press the [
] button, and then
choose [My Colors] on the [
] tab
(= 29).
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
2 Choose an image.
●● Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose an image, and then press
the [ ] button.
3
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Choose an option.
●● Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose an option, and then press
the [ ] button.
103
4 Save as a new image and review.
3 Choose an option.
●● Follow steps 4 – 5 in “Resizing Images”
(= 102).
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
●● Image quality of pictures you repeatedly edit this way will be
a little lower each time, and you may not be able to obtain the
desired color.
Camera Basics
4 Save as a new image and review.
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
●● Follow steps 4 – 5 in “Resizing Images”
(= 102).
●● The color of images edited using this function may vary slightly
from the color of images shot using My Colors (= 74).
Other Shooting Modes
●● For some images, correction may be inaccurate or may cause
images to appear grainy.
●● Images may look grainy after repeated editing using this function.
Correcting Image Brightness (i-Contrast)
 Still Images Before Use
●● Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose an option, and then press
the [ ] button.
 Movies
Excessively dark image areas (such as faces or backgrounds) can be
detected and automatically adjusted to the optimal brightness. Insufficient
overall image contrast is also automatically corrected, to make subjects
stand out better. Choose from four correction levels, and then save the
image as a separate file.
1 Choose [i-Contrast].
●● Press the [
] button, and then
choose [i-Contrast] on the [
] tab
(= 29).
2 Choose an image.
●● Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose an image, and then press
the [ ] button.
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Playback Mode
●● If [Auto] does not produce the expected results, try correcting
images using [Low], [Medium], or [High].
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Correcting Red-Eye
 Still Images Accessories
 Movies
Automatically corrects images affected by red-eye. You can save the
corrected image as a separate file.
Appendix
1 Choose [Red-Eye Correction].
●● Press the [
] button, and then
choose [Red-Eye Correction] on the [
tab (= 29).
Index
]
104
2 Choose an image.
●● Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [
dial to choose an image.
]
3 Correct the image.
●● Press the [
] button.
 Still Images  Movies
You can remove unneeded portions from the beginning and end of movies
(excluding digest movies, = 34).
1 Choose [
●● Red-eye detected by the camera is now
corrected, and frames are displayed
around corrected image areas.
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
].
●● Following steps 1 – 5 in “Viewing”
(= 87), choose [ ] and press the [
button.
●● Enlarge or reduce images as needed.
Follow the steps in “Magnifying Images”
(= 94).
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
]
Other Shooting Modes
●● The movie editing panel and editing bar
are now displayed.
4 Save as a new image and review.
(1)
●● Press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons or turn
the [ ] dial to choose [New File], and
then press the [ ] button.
P Mode
2 Specify portions to cut.
Tv, Av, and M Mode
●● (1) is the movie editing panel, and (2) is
the editing bar.
●● The image is now saved as a new file.
●● Press the [
or [ ].
●● Follow step 5 in “Resizing Images”
(= 102).
●● Some images may not be corrected accurately.
●● To overwrite the original image with the corrected image, choose
[Overwrite] in step 4. In this case, the original image will be
erased.
●● Protected images cannot be overwritten.
Before Use
Editing Movies
(2)
][
] buttons to choose [
Playback Mode
]
Wi-Fi Functions
●● To view the portions you can cut
(identified by [ ] on the screen), press
the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial to
move [ ]. Cut the beginning of the movie
(from [ ]) by choosing [ ], and cut the
end of the movie by choosing [ ].
●● If you move [ ] to a position other than a
[ ] mark, in [ ] the portion before the
nearest [ ] mark on the left will be cut,
while in [ ] the portion after the nearest
[ ] mark on the right will be cut.
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
105
3 Review the edited movie.
●● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose [ ],
and then press the [ ] button. The edited
movie is now played.
●● To edit the movie again, repeat step 2.
]
●● To cancel editing, press the [
button, choose [OK] (either press the
[ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial), and
then press the [ ] button.
Before Use
Reducing File Sizes
Movie file sizes can be reduced by compressing movies as follows.
●● On the screen in step 2 of “Editing
Movies”, choose [ ]. Choose [New File],
and then press the [ ] button.
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
●● Choose [Compress & Sav.], and then
press the [ ] button.
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
4 Save the edited movie.
●● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose [ ],
and then press the [ ] button.
●● Press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons or turn
the [ ] dial to choose [New File], and
then press the [ ] button.
Other Shooting Modes
●● Compressed movies are saved in [
] format.
] movies cannot be compressed.
●● [
●● Edited movies cannot be saved in compressed format when you
choose [Overwrite].
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Playback Mode
●● Choose [Save w/o Comp.], and then
press the [ ] button.
Wi-Fi Functions
●● The movie is now saved as a new file.
Setting Menu
Accessories
●● To overwrite the original movie with the cut one, choose
[Overwrite] in step 4. In this case, the original movie will be erased.
●● If the memory card lacks sufficient space, only [Overwrite] will be
available.
●● Movies may not be saved if the battery pack runs out while saving
is in progress.
●● When editing movies, use a fully charged battery pack, if possible.
Appendix
Index
106
Erasing Movie Chapters
 Still Images  Movies
Individual chapters (clips) recorded in [
] and [ ] mode (= 34,
= 58) can be erased, as needed. Note that erased clips cannot be
recovered. Be sure that you want to erase the clips before using this
option.
●● Albums (= 109) with BGM cannot be edited.
●● [ ] is not displayed if you select a clip when the camera is
connected to a printer.
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
1 Select the clip to erase.
●● Play a short movie as described in steps
1 – 2 of “Viewing Short Movies Recorded
in Creative Shot Mode (Creative Shot
Movies)” (= 89) or in steps 1 – 2 of
“Viewing Short Movies Created When
Shooting Still Images (Digest Movies)”
(= 90), and then press the [ ] button
to access the movie control panel.
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Playback Mode
●● Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [ ] or [ ], and then press
the [ ] button to choose a clip.
2 Choose [
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
].
●● Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [ ], and then press the [ ]
button.
●● The selected clip is played back
repeatedly.
Accessories
Appendix
Index
3 Confirm erasure.
●● Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [OK], and then press the
[ ] button.
●● The clip is erased, and the short movie is
overwritten.
107
Viewing Albums (Story Highlights)
 Still Images  Movies
You can choose themes such as a date or person’s name to create an
album of automatically selected images that match the theme. These
images are combined into a slideshow that can be saved as a short movie
of about 2 – 3 minutes.
Before using this feature, make sure the battery pack is fully charged.
Creating albums also requires free space on the memory card. As a
guideline, use a memory card with a capacity of 16 GB or higher, and
ensure at least 1 GB of free space.
Choosing Themes for Albums
Press the [ ] button to access the home screen and choose the theme
for the camera to use when selecting album elements. Note that the
camera is more likely to add images tagged as favorites (= 101) to
albums.
Date
Person’s
name
Event
Custom
Creates an album of images shot on the same day.
Images are selected from those shot on the same day as
the image displayed before you access the home screen.
Can be used to create monthly albums of people, such as
albums of children as they grow up.
Subjects whose Face ID information you registered before
shooting may be selected for albums.
Images selected are those that have the same subject
shot during the same month as the image displayed before
you access the home screen.
A good choice for albums of vacations, parties, or other
events.
Images are selected from those shot during the event
before and after the image displayed before you access
the home screen.
Includes images based on your specified images, dates, or
people registered in Face ID.
1 Choose an image.
●● Choose an image in single-image display.
●● Themes available in step 3 will vary
depending on image shooting date and
Face ID information.
2
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Access the home screen.
●● Press the [
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
] button.
●● After [Busy] is displayed, the home
screen is displayed.
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
3 Preview an album.
●● Choose a person, [Date], or [Event]
(either press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the
[ ] dial) as the album theme, and then
press the [ ] button.
Tv, Av, and M Mode
●● After [Loading] is displayed for a few
seconds, the album is played.
Wi-Fi Functions
Playback Mode
4 Save the album.
Setting Menu
●● Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [Save Album as Movie],
and then press the [ ] button.
●● Once the album is saved, [Saved] is
displayed.
Accessories
Appendix
Index
5 Play the album (= 87).
108
●● Albums can include following images captured by the camera.
-- Still images
-- Digest movies (= 34)
-- Short movie clips (= 68) of two seconds or longer, or
Creative Shot movies (= 58), except compressed movies
●● Albums cannot be saved unless there is enough space on the
memory card.
●● While the preview is playing, press the [ ] button to jump to the
next chapter, and press the [ ] button to jump to the previous
chapter.
●● You can specify the color effect in step 4 by choosing [Change
Color Effect] and pressing the [ ] button. To preview how the
album looks with your selected effect applied, choose [Preview
Album Again] on the screen in step 4 after pressing the [ ][ ]
buttons to choose a color effect and pressing the [ ] button.
●● To play saved albums, choose [List of Albums] on the Story
Highlights home screen, press the [ ] button, choose a listed
album, and press the [ ] button again.
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
●● When using a memory card with music
already registered to it, go to step 2.
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
2 Create the album.
●● Follow steps 1 – 3 in “Viewing Albums
(Story Highlights)” (= 108) to create an
album.
3
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Configure background music
settings.
●● Choose an item, and then press the [
button to choose an option (= 29).
Tv, Av, and M Mode
]
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
4 Save the album.
Adding Background Music to Albums
 Still Images ●● The first time you use a memory card,
or after it has been reset, the screen on
the left is displayed. Choose [OK] and
press the [ ] button. In approximately
4 minutes, seven different BGM are
recorded in the memory card.
 Movies
Choose from seven kinds of background music to play during album
playback.
1 Register background music to a
memory card.
●● Following steps 1 – 4 in “Viewing Albums
(Story Highlights)” (= 108), choose
[Music Settings] and press the [ ]
button.
Setting Menu
●● Follow step 4 in “Viewing Albums (Story
Highlights)” (= 108) to save albums.
Accessories
Appendix
●● Once albums are saved, background music cannot be added
later. Background music in albums cannot be removed or
changed.
●● Chapters of albums with background music cannot be edited
(= 107).
Index
109
●● If you prefer not to add background music, set [Add BGM] to [No]
on the screen in step 3.
●● To use only background music instead of movie audio, set [Audio
Mixer] to [BGM only] on the screen in step 3.
●● To listen to a sample of the background music selected in [Track],
choose [Sample BGM] on the screen in step 3 and press the [ ]
button.
Creating Your Own Albums
 Still Images  Movies
Create your own albums by choosing desired images.
1 Choose to create a Custom album.
●● Following steps 1 – 3 in “Viewing Albums
(Story Highlights)” (= 108), choose
[Custom] and press the [ ] button.
2 Choose a selection method.
●● Choose [Image Selection], [Date
Selection], or [Person Selection], and
then press the [ ] button.
3 Choose album elements.
●● Once you select the elements for your
album and press the [ ] button, your
selected elements are labeled with [ ].
●● Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [Preview], and then press
the [ ] button.
4 Choose background music.
●● Once the screen on the left is displayed,
choose [Music Settings], and after adding
BGM using the procedure in “Adding
Background Music to Albums” (= 109),
press the [
] button.
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
5 Choose a color effect.
●● On the screen in step 4 of “Viewing
Albums (Story Highlights)” (= 108),
choose [Change Color Effect].
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M Mode
●● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose
a color effect, and then press the
[ ] button.
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
6 Save the album.
●● Follow step 4 in “Viewing Albums (Story
Highlights)” (= 108) to save albums.
Setting Menu
Accessories
●● You can specify up to 40 files (or 10 movie files) after choosing
[Image Selection]. From the second time, [Select images based
on previous settings?] is displayed, and if you choose [Yes], a
multi-playback screen is displayed with the still images, short clip
movies or Creative Shot movies that have [ ].
●● Up to 15 dates can be selected if you choose [Date Selection].
●● The color effect may not be applied to some images.
Appendix
Index
●● After choosing still images, short clip
movies, or Creative Shot movies in
[Image Selection], and the date or person
in [Date Selection] or [Person Selection],
] button.
press the [
110
3 Preview the movie.
Combining Short Clips
 Still Images  Movies
Combine short clips to create a longer movie.
Note that movies created this way are not included in Story Highlights
albums (= 108).
1 Access the editing screen.
●● Press the [
] button, choose
[Short Clip Mix] on the [ ] tab, and then
choose [Merge
Clips] (= 29).
Before Use
]
Basic Guide
●● After [Loading] is displayed for a few
seconds, a preview of the combined clips
is played.
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
4 Save the movie.
●● Choose [Save], and then press the [
button.
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
]
Other Shooting Modes
●● Once the movie is saved, [Saved] is
displayed.
P Mode
5 Play the movie.
2 Specify clips to combine.
●● Press the [ ] [ ] or turn the [ ] dial,
choose a clip to combine from the clips
on the top of the screen, and press the
[ ] button.
●● Your selected clip is displayed on the
bottom of the screen.
●● To cancel selection, press the [
again.
●● Choose [Preview] and press the [
button.
] button
●● Repeat these steps to specify other clips
to combine.
●● After you are finished selecting clips,
] button.
press the [
Tv, Av, and M Mode
●● Choose [Play Back
Movie] on the
screen in step 1 to view a list of movies
you have created.
Playback Mode
●● Choose the movie to play and press the
[ ] button.
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
●● To play the selected clip, move the zoom lever toward [
] on the
screen in step 2.
●● To rearrange clips, press the [ ] button on the screen in step 2,
select a clip, press the [ ] button, press the [ ][ ] buttons or
turn the [ ] dial, and then press the [ ] button again.
●● To apply a color effect, choose [Change Color Effect] on the
screen in step 3.
●● Choosing [Music Settings] on the screen in step 3 will allow you to
add BGM (= 109).
●● The movie is saved with an image quality of [ ].
●● Use a fully charged battery pack, if possible.
Accessories
Appendix
Index
111
Available Wi-Fi Features
You can send and receive images and control the camera remotely by
connecting it to these devices and services via Wi-Fi.
Wi-Fi Functions
Send images wirelessly from the camera to a variety of compatible
devices, and use the camera with Web services
●● Before using Wi-Fi, be sure to read “Wi-Fi (Wireless LAN)
Precautions” (= 183).
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
●● Smartphones and Tablets
Send images to smartphones and tablet computers that have Wi-Fi
functions. You can also shoot remotely and geotag your shots from a
smartphone or tablet.
For convenience in this manual, smartphones, tablets, and other
compatible devices are collectively referred to as “smartphones”.
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
●● Computer
Use software to save camera images to a computer connected via Wi-Fi.
P Mode
●● Web Services
Add your account information to the camera for CANON iMAGE
GATEWAY online photography service or other Web services to send
camera images to the services. Unsent images on the camera can also
be sent to a computer or Web service via CANON iMAGE GATEWAY.
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Playback Mode
●● Printers
Send images wirelessly to a PictBridge-compatible printer (supporting
DPS over IP) to print them.
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
●● Another Camera
Send images wirelessly between Wi-Fi compatible Canon cameras.
Accessories
Appendix
Index
112
Sending Images to a Smartphone
There are several ways to connect the camera to a smartphone and
send images.
●● Connect via NFC (= 113)
Simply touch an NFC-compatible Android smartphone (OS version 4.0
or later) against the camera to connect the devices.
●● Use the Wi-Fi menu to connect (= 116)
You can connect the camera to a smartphone as you would connect it
to a computer or other device. Multiple smartphones can be added.
Before connecting to the camera, you must install the free dedicated Camera
Connect app on the smartphone. For details on this application (supported
smartphones and included functions), refer to the Canon website.
●● If you own a Wi-Fi compatible Canon camera and your camera
and smartphone are connected to Wi-Fi, it is recommended
that you change the app that you use on your smartphone from
“CameraWindow” to “Camera Connect”.
Sending Images to an NFC-Compatible
Smartphone
Before Use
Using an NFC-compatible Android smartphone (OS version 4.0 or later)
simplifies the process of installing Camera Connect and connecting the
devices via NFC.
Operation once the devices are connected via NFC varies depending on
the camera mode when the devices are touched together.
Advanced Guide
Basic Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
●● If the camera is off or in Shooting mode when the devices are touched
together, you can choose and send images on the image selection
screen. Once the devices are connected, you can also shoot remotely
and geotag your shots (= 135). It’s easy to reconnect to recent
devices, which are listed in the Wi-Fi menu.
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
●● When you touch the smartphone in Playback mode, the screen with
a list of images that you can choose to send is displayed. Choose an
image to send it.
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Playback Mode
Follow the instructions in the following section for NFC-initiated connection
to a camera that is off or in Shooting mode.
Wi-Fi Functions
Connecting via NFC When Camera Is Off or in
Shooting Mode
Setting Menu
Accessories
1 Install Camera Connect.
●● Activate NFC on the smartphone and
touch the device against the camera’s
N-Mark( ) to start Google Play on the
smartphone automatically. Once the
Camera Connect download page is
displayed, download and install the app.
Appendix
Index
113
2 Establish the connection.
●● Make sure the camera is off or in
Shooting mode.
●● Touch the N-Mark ( ) on the smartphone
with Camera Connect installed against
the camera’s N-Mark.
●● The camera starts up automatically.
●● If the [Device Nickname] screen is
displayed, press the [ ][ ] buttons or
turn the [ ] dial to choose [OK], and then
press the [ ] button.
●● Camera Connect is started on the
smartphone.
●● The devices are connected automatically.
3 Adjust the privacy setting.
●● Press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons or turn
the [ ] dial to choose an image to
send, press the [ ] button to mark it
as selected ([ ]), and then press the
[
] button.
●● Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [OK], and then press the
[ ] button.
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
●● Press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons or turn
the [ ] dial to choose [Send], and then
press the [ ] button.
Other Shooting Modes
●● [Transfer completed] is displayed after
the image is sent, and the image transfer
screen is displayed again.
P Mode
●● To end the connection, press the
] button, choose [OK] on the
[
confirmation screen (either press the
[ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial), and
then press the [ ] button. You can
also use the smartphone to end the
connection.
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
●● When this screen is displayed, press
the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial to
choose [Yes], and then press the [ ]
button.
●● You can now use the smartphone to
browse, import, or geotag images on the
camera or shoot remotely.
Accessories
Appendix
Index
4 Send images.
●● Press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons or turn
the [ ] dial to choose [Select and send],
and then press the [ ] button.
●● Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial and select [Select], and then press
the [ ] button.
114
●● When using NFC, keep the following points in mind.
-- Avoid strong impact between the camera and smartphone. This
may damage the devices.
-- Depending on the smartphone, the devices may not recognize
each other immediately. In this case, try holding the devices
together in slightly different positions. If connection is not
established, keep the devices together until the camera screen
is updated.
-- If you try to connect while the camera is off, a message will be
displayed on your smartphone to ask you to turn the camera on.
Touch and try again after the camera is turned on.
-- Do not place other objects between the camera and
smartphone. Also, note that camera or smartphone covers or
similar accessories may block communication.
●● All images in the camera can be viewed from the connected
smartphone when you choose [Yes] in step 3. To keep camera
images private, so that they cannot be viewed from the
smartphone, choose [No] in step 3.
●● Once you have registered a smartphone, you can change privacy
settings for it on the camera (= 137).
●● Connections require that a memory card be in the camera.
●● You can change the nickname of the camera displayed on the
screen of step 2 (= 137).
●● Not all NFC-compatible smartphones have an N-Mark ( ). For
details, refer to the smartphone user manual.
●● You can also send multiple images at once and change the image
size before sending (= 131).
●● You can send the current image by choosing [Send this image] on
the screen in step 4.
●● To disable NFC connections, choose MENU (= 29) > [ ] tab
> [Wireless settings] > [Wi-Fi Settings] > [NFC] > [Off].
Connecting via NFC When Camera Is in Playback
Mode
●● Press the [
on.
] button to turn the camera
●● Touch the N-Mark ( ) on the smartphone
(= 113) with Camera Connect installed
against the camera’s N-Mark.
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
●● Press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons or turn
the [ ] dial to choose an image to send,
and then press the [ ] button. [ ] is
displayed.
Other Shooting Modes
●● To untag the image, press the [ ] button
again. [ ] is no longer displayed.
P Mode
●● Repeat this process to choose additional
images.
Tv, Av, and M Mode
●● After you finish choosing images, press
] button.
the [
Playback Mode
●● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose [OK],
and then press the [ ] button.
Wi-Fi Functions
●● Press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons or turn
the [ ] dial to choose [Send], and then
press the [ ] button.
Setting Menu
Accessories
●● The images are sent.
●● If a message is displayed on the camera and requests you to
enter the nickname during connection, follow step 2 in “Sending
Images to an NFC-Compatible Smartphone” (= 113) to enter it.
●● The camera does not keep a record of smartphones you connect
to via NFC in Playback mode.
●● You can preset images to transfer at your desired size (= 131).
Appendix
Index
115
Adding a Smartphone
●● The camera’s SSID and password are
displayed.
These steps show how to use the camera as an access point, but you can
also use an existing access point (= 118).
1
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Install Camera Connect.
●● For an iPhone and iPad, find Camera
Connect in the App Store and download
and install the app.
●● For Android smartphones, find Camera
Connect in Google Play and download
and install the app.
2 Access the Wi-Fi menu.
●● Press the [
] button.
●● If the [Device Nickname] screen is
displayed, choose [OK] (= 114).
3 Choose [
].
●● Press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons or turn
the [ ] dial to choose [ ], and then press
the [ ] button.
4 Choose [Add a Device].
●● Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [Add a Device], and then
press the [ ] button.
Camera Basics
5 Connect the smartphone to the
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
network.
Other Shooting Modes
●● In the smartphone’s Wi-Fi setting menu,
choose the SSID (network name)
displayed on the camera to establish a
connection.
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M Mode
●● In the password field, enter the password
displayed on the camera.
Playback Mode
6 Start Camera Connect.
Wi-Fi Functions
●● Start Camera Connect on the
smartphone.
Setting Menu
7 Choose the camera to connect.
●● When the screen for choosing the target
camera is displayed on your smartphone,
choose the camera to pair them.
8 Adjust the privacy setting.
Accessories
Appendix
Index
●● Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [Yes], and then press the
[ ] button.
●● You can now use the smartphone to
browse, import, or geotag images on the
camera or shoot remotely.
116
9 Send images.
●● Press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons or turn
the [ ] dial to choose [Select and send],
and then press the [ ] button.
●● Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial and select [Select], and then press
the [ ] button.
●● Press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons or turn
the [ ] dial to choose an image to
send, press the [ ] button to mark it
as selected ([ ]), and then press the
[
] button.
●● Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [OK], and then press the
[ ] button.
●● Press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons or turn
the [ ] dial to choose [Send], and then
press the [ ] button.
●● [Transfer completed] is displayed after
the image is sent, and the image transfer
screen is displayed again.
●● To end the connection, press the
[
] button, choose [OK] on the
confirmation screen (either press the
[ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial), and
then press the [ ] button. You can
also use the smartphone to end the
connection.
●● All images in the camera can be viewed from the connected
smartphone when you choose [Yes] in step 8. To keep camera
images private, so that they cannot be viewed from the
smartphone, choose [No] in step 8.
●● Once you have registered a smartphone, you can change privacy
settings for it on the camera (= 137).
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
●● Connections require that a memory card be in the camera.
●● Once you have connected to devices via the Wi-Fi menu, recent
destinations will be listed first when you access the Wi-Fi menu.
You can easily connect again by pressing the [ ][ ] buttons to
choose the device and then pressing the [ ] button. To add a
new device, display the device selection screen by pressing the
[ ][ ] buttons, and then configure the setting.
●● If you prefer not to display recent target devices, choose MENU
(= 29) > [ ] tab > [Wireless settings] > [Wi-Fi Settings] >
[Target History] > [Off].
●● To be able to connect without entering the password in step 5
and to make it so that [Password] does not display on the SSID
display screen (step 4), choose MENU (= 29) > [ ] tab >
[Wireless settings] > [Wi-Fi Settings] > [Password] > [Off].
●● You can also send multiple images at once and change the image
size before sending (= 131).
●● You can send the current image by choosing [Send this image] on
the screen in step 9.
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
●● To add multiple smartphones, repeat the
above procedure starting from step 1.
117
Using Another Access Point
When connecting the camera to a smartphone through the Wi-Fi menu,
you can also use an existing access point.
1
Prepare for the connection.
●● Access the [Waiting to connect] screen
by following steps 1 – 4 in “Adding a
Smartphone” (= 116).
2 Connect the smartphone to the
access point.
3 Choose [Switch Network].
●● Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [Switch Network], and then
press the [ ] button.
●● A list of detected access points will be
displayed.
4 Connect to the access point.
●● For WPS-compatible access points,
follow steps 5 – 8 in “Using WPSCompatible Access Points” (= 121) to
connect to the access point.
5 Choose the camera to connect.
●● Once the screen to choose the camera
to connect to is displayed on the
smartphone, choose the camera and pair
it to the smartphone.
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
6 Configure the privacy settings and
Camera Basics
send images.
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
●● Follow steps 8 – 9 in “Adding a
Smartphone” (= 116) to configure the
privacy settings and send images.
Other Shooting Modes
Previous Access Points
P Mode
You can reconnect to any previous access points automatically by
following step 4 in “Adding a Smartphone” (= 116).
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Playback Mode
●● To use the camera as an access point, choose [Switch Network] on the
screen displayed when you establish a connection, and then choose
[Camera Access Point Mode].
Wi-Fi Functions
●● To switch access points, choose [Switch Network] on the screen
displayed when you establish a connection, and then follow the
procedure in “Using Another Access Point” (= 118) from step 4.
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
●● For non-WPS access points, follow steps
2 – 4 in “Connecting to Listed Access
Points” (= 123) to connect to the
access point.
118
Saving Images to a Computer
Preparing to Register a Computer
For detailed system requirements, such as about computers that can
connect to the camera and Wi-Fi, and compatibility information, including
support in new operating systems, visit the Canon website.
●● Windows 7 Starter and Home Basic editions are not supported.
●● Windows 7 N (European version) and KN (South Korean version)
require a separate download and installation of Windows Media
Feature Pack.
For details, check the following website.
http://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/?LinkId=159730
Installing the Software
Windows 7 and Mac OS X 10.8 are used here for the sake of illustration.
1
2 Install the software.
●● Click [Easy Installation] and follow the
on-screen instructions to complete the
installation process.
●● Installation may take some time,
depending on computer performance and
the Internet connection.
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
●● Click [Finish] or [Restart] on the screen
after installation.
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
●● Internet access is required, and any ISP account charges and
access fees must be paid separately.
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M Mode
●● Use the following procedure to uninstall (delete) the software.
-- If using Windows, click the [Start] menu > [All Programs] >
[Canon Utilities], and choose the software that you want to
uninstall.
-- If using Mac OS, click the [Applications] folder > [Canon
Utilities], and then move the folder of the software that you want
to uninstall to the Trash. Empty the Trash.
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Download the software.
Accessories
●● With a computer connected to the
Internet, access the following website.
Appendix
http://www.canon.com/icpd/
●● Choose the country/area where you live,
and then follow the on-screen instructions
to download the software.
Index
●● The software will be downloaded to your
computer in a zipped format.
119
Configuring the Computer for a Wi-Fi Connection
(Windows Only)
On a computer running Windows, configure the following settings before
connecting the camera to the computer wirelessly.
1 Confirm that the computer is
connected to an access point.
●● For instructions on checking your network
connection, refer to the computer user
manual.
2 Configure the setting.
●● Click in the following order: [Start] menu
> [All Programs] > [Canon Utilities] >
[CameraWindow] > [Wi-Fi connection
setup].
●● In the application that opens, follow the
on-screen instructions and configure the
setting.
●● The following Windows settings are configured when you run the
utility in step 2.
-- Turn on media streaming.
This will enable the camera to see (find) the computer to access
via Wi-Fi.
-- Turn on network discovery.
This will enable the computer to see (find) the camera.
-- Turn on ICMP (Internet Control Message Protocol).
This allows you to check the network connection status.
-- Enable Universal Plug & Play (UPnP).
This will enable network devices to detect each other
automatically.
●● Some security software may prevent you from completing the
settings as described here. Check the settings of your security
software.
Saving Images to a Connected Computer
Connect to your access point via Wi-Fi as follows.
Also refer to the access point user manual.
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Confirming Access Point Compatibility
Camera Basics
Confirm that the Wi-Fi router or base station conforms to the Wi-Fi
standards in “Camera” (= 177).
Connection methods vary depending on whether the access point
supports Wi-Fi Protected Setup (WPS, = 121) or not (= 123). For
non-WPS access points, check the following information.
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
●● Network name (SSID/ESSID)
The SSID or ESSID for the access point you use. Also called the
“access point name” or “network name”.
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M Mode
●● Network authentication / data encryption (encryption method /
encryption mode)
The method for encrypting data during wireless transmission. Check
which security setting is used: WPA2-PSK (AES), WPA2-PSK
(TKIP), WPA-PSK (AES), WPA-PSK (TKIP), WEP (open system
authentication), or no security.
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
●● Password (encryption key / network key)
The key used when encrypting data during wireless transmission. Also
called the “encryption key” or “network key”.
●● Key index (transmit key)
The key set when WEP is used for network authentication / data
encryption. Use “1” as the setting.
Accessories
Appendix
Index
●● If system administrator status is needed to adjust network
settings, contact the system administrator for details.
●● These settings are very important for network security. Exercise
adequate caution when changing these settings.
120
●● For information on WPS compatibility and for instructions on
checking settings, refer to the access point user manual.
●● A router is a device that creates a network (LAN) structure for
connecting multiple computers. A router that contains an internal
Wi-Fi function is called a “Wi-Fi router”.
●● This guide refers to all Wi-Fi routers and base stations as “access
points”.
●● If you use MAC address filtering on your Wi-Fi network, be sure
to add the camera’s MAC address to your access point. You can
check your camera’s MAC address by choosing MENU (= 29) >
[ ] tab > [Wireless settings] > [Wi-Fi Settings] > [Check MAC
Address].
3 Choose [
].
●● Press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons or turn
the [ ] dial to choose [ ], and then
press the [ ] button.
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
4 Choose [Add a Device].
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
●● Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [Add a Device], and then
press the [ ] button.
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Using WPS-Compatible Access Points
WPS makes it easy to complete settings when connecting devices over
Wi-Fi. You can use either Push Button Configuration Method or PIN
Method for settings on a WPS supported device.
1 Confirm that the computer is
5 Choose [WPS Connection].
Tv, Av, and M Mode
●● Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [WPS Connection], and
then press the [ ] button.
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
connected to an access point.
●● For instructions on checking the
connection, refer to the device and
access point user manuals.
2 Access the Wi-Fi menu.
●● Press the [
6 Choose [PBC Method].
Accessories
●● Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [PBC Method], and then
press the [ ] button.
] button.
●● If the [Device Nickname] screen is
displayed, press the [ ][ ] buttons or
turn the [ ] dial to choose [OK], and then
press the [ ] button.
Setting Menu
Appendix
Index
7 Establish the connection.
●● On the access point, hold down the WPS
connection button for a few seconds.
121
●● On the camera, press the [
go to the next step.
] button to
●● The camera connects to the access point
and lists devices connected to it on the
[Select a Device] screen.
8 Choose the target device.
●● Choose the target device name (either
press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial), and then press the [ ] button.
9 Install a driver (first Windows
connection only).
●● When this screen is displayed on the
camera, click the Start menu on the
computer, click [Control Panel], and then
click [Add a device].
10 Display CameraWindow.
●● Windows: Access CameraWindow by
clicking [Downloads Images From Canon
Camera].
●● Mac OS: CameraWindow is automatically
displayed when a Wi-Fi connection is
established between the camera and
computer.
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
11 Import images.
●● Click [Import Images from Camera], and
then click [Import Untransferred Images].
Other Shooting Modes
●● Images are now saved to the Pictures
folder on the computer, in separate
folders named by date.
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M Mode
●● Click [OK] in the screen that is displayed
after image import is complete.
Playback Mode
●● To look at a image saved on your
computer, use a software (such as one
installed on your computer by default or
general software) that supports images
shot with a camera.
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
●● Double-click the connected camera icon.
Appendix
●● Driver installation will begin.
●● After driver installation is complete, and
the camera and computer connection
is enabled, the AutoPlay screen will be
displayed. Nothing will be displayed on
the camera screen.
Index
122
●● Once you have connected to devices via the Wi-Fi menu, recent
destinations will be listed first when you access the Wi-Fi menu.
You can easily connect again by pressing the [ ][ ] buttons to
choose the device and then pressing the [ ] button. To add a
new device, display the device selection screen by pressing the
[ ][ ] buttons, and then configure the setting.
●● If you prefer not to display recent target devices, choose MENU
(= 29) > [ ] tab > [Wireless settings] > [Wi-Fi Settings] >
[Target History] > [Off].
●● You can change the nickname of the camera displayed on the
screen of step 2 (= 138).
●● When the camera is connected to a computer, the camera screen
is blank.
●● Mac OS: If CameraWindow is not displayed, click the
[CameraWindow] icon in the Dock.
●● To disconnect from the camera, turn off the camera.
●● If you chose [PIN Method] in step 6, a PIN code will be displayed
on the screen. Be sure to set this code in the access point.
Choose a device in the [Select a Device] screen. For further
details, refer to the user manual included with your access point.
Connecting to Listed Access Points
1 View the listed access points.
●● View the listed networks (access points)
as described in steps 1 – 4 of “Using
WPS-Compatible Access Points”
(= 121).
3 Enter the access point password.
●● Press the [ ] button to access the
keyboard, and then enter the password
(= 30).
●● Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [Next], and then press the
[ ] button.
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
4 Choose [Auto].
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
●● Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [Auto], and then press the
[ ] button.
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
●● To save images to a connected computer,
follow the procedure from step 8 in
“Using WPS-Compatible Access Points”
(= 121).
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Playback Mode
●● To determine the access point password, check on the access
point itself or refer to the user manual.
●● If no access points are detected even after you choose [Refresh]
in step 2 to update the list, choose [Manual Settings] in step 2
to complete access point settings manually. Follow on-screen
instructions and enter an SSID, security settings, and a password.
●● When you use an access point that you have already connected
to for connecting to another device, [*] is displayed for the
password in step 3. To use the same password, choose [Next]
(either press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial) and press
the [ ] button.
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
2 Choose an access point.
●● Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose a network (access point),
and then press the [ ] button.
123
Previous Access Points
You can reconnect to any previous access points automatically by
following step 4 in “Using WPS-Compatible Access Points” (= 121).
●● To reconnect to the access point, confirm that the target device is
already connected to it, and then follow the procedure from step 8 in
“Using WPS-Compatible Access Points” (= 121).
●● To switch access points, choose [Switch Network] on the screen
displayed when you establish a connection, and then either follow
the procedure in “Using WPS-Compatible Access Points” (= 121)
from step 5 or the procedure in “Connecting to Listed Access Points”
(= 123) from step 2.
Sending Images to a Registered
Web Service
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Registering Web Services
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Use a smartphone or computer to add to the camera Web services that
you want to use.
Other Shooting Modes
●● A smartphone or computer with a browser and Internet connection is
required to complete camera settings for CANON iMAGE GATEWAY
and other Web services.
P Mode
●● Check the CANON iMAGE GATEWAY website for details on browser
(Microsoft Internet Explorer, etc.) requirements, including settings and
version information.
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Playback Mode
●● For information on countries and regions where CANON iMAGE
GATEWAY is available, visit the Canon website (http://www.canon.
com/cig/).
Wi-Fi Functions
●● You must have an account with Web services other than CANON
iMAGE GATEWAY if you desire to use them. For further details, check
the websites for each Web service you want to register.
Setting Menu
Accessories
●● Separate ISP connection and access point fees may be applicable.
●● You can also download the user manual from CANON iMAGE
GATEWAY.
Appendix
Index
124
Registering CANON iMAGE GATEWAY
To link the camera and CANON iMAGE GATEWAY, add CANON iMAGE
GATEWAY as a destination Web service on the camera. By setting
this, an e-mail notification for Camera Web Link Settings will be sent,
so you must use the e-mail address that you use on your computer or
smartphone.
1 Access the Wi-Fi menu.
●● Press the [
] button.
●● If the [Device Nickname] screen is
displayed, press the [ ][ ] buttons or
turn the [ ] dial to choose [OK], and then
press the [ ] button.
2 Choose [
].
●● Press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons or turn
the [ ] dial to choose [
], and then
press the [ ] button.
3 Consent to entering your e-mail
address.
4 Establish a connection with an
access point.
●● Connect to the access point as described
in steps 5 – 7 in “Using WPS-Compatible
Access Points” (= 121) or in steps 2 – 4
in “Connecting to Listed Access Points”
(= 123).
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
5 Enter your e-mail address.
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
●● Once the camera is connected to CANON
iMAGE GATEWAY via the access point, a
screen is displayed for entering an e-mail
address.
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
●● Enter your e-mail address, press the
[ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial
to choose [Next], and then press the
[ ] button.
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Playback Mode
6 Enter a four-digit number.
Wi-Fi Functions
●● Enter any four-digit number, press the
[ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial
to choose [Next], and then press the
[ ] button.
Setting Menu
Accessories
●● You will need this four-digit number later
when setting up linkage with CANON
iMAGE GATEWAY in step 8.
Appendix
Index
●● Read the displayed contents, press
the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial
to choose [I Agree], and then press the
[ ] button.
125
7 Confirm the e-mail notification was
sent.
●● When information is sent from CANON
iMAGE GATEWAY, an e-mail notification
is sent to the e-mail address you entered
in step 5.
●● The screen notifying you that the e-mail
notification was sent is displayed. Press
the [ ] button.
●● The [
] icon changes to [
].
●● Depending on your e-mail settings on your computer or
smartphone, e-mail from specific domains may be rejected, and
you may not be able to receive the e-mail notification. Please
check your settings ahead of time.
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
●● You can change the nickname of the camera displayed on the
screen of step 1 (= 125).
●● Once you have connected to devices via the Wi-Fi menu, recent
destinations will be listed first when you access the menu. Press
the [ ][ ] buttons to access the device selection screen and then
configure the setting.
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
8 Access the URL in the received
e-mail notification and set the
camera web link.
●● From a computer or smartphone,
access the page linked in the notification
message.
●● Follow the directions on the Camera
Web Link Settings page to configure the
settings.
9 Set CANON iMAGE GATEWAY on
the camera.
●● Press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons or turn
the [ ] dial to choose [
], and then
press the [ ] button.
●● [ ] (= 133) and CANON iMAGE
GATEWAY are now added as
destinations.
Registering Other Web Services
Tv, Av, and M Mode
You can also add Web services besides CANON iMAGE GATEWAY to
the camera.
1
Playback Mode
Log in to CANON iMAGE GATEWAY
and access the Camera Web Link
Settings page.
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
●● From a computer or smartphone, access
http://www.canon.com/cig/ to visit
CANON iMAGE GATEWAY.
Accessories
2 Configure the Web service you want
to use.
●● Using your computer or smartphone,
display the Web service settings screen.
Appendix
Index
●● Follow the instructions displayed on the
screen to set up the Web service.
●● You can also add other Web services.
To add other Web services, follow the
procedure in “Registering Other Web
Services” (= 126) from step 2.
126
3 Choose [
●● Press the [
].
] button.
●● Press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons or turn
the [ ] dial to choose [
], and then
press the [ ] button.
●● The Web service settings are now
updated.
●● If any configured settings change, follow these steps again to
update the camera settings.
Uploading Images to Web Services
1 Access the Wi-Fi menu.
●● Press the [
] button.
2 Choose the destination.
●● Press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons or turn
the [ ] dial, and choose the icon of the
Web service to connect to target device,
and then press the [ ] button.
●● If multiple recipients or sharing options
are used with a Web service, choose the
desired item on the [Select Recipient]
screen (either press the [ ][ ] buttons
or turn the [ ] dial), and then press the
[ ] button.
3 Send images.
●● Press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons or turn
the [ ] dial to choose [Select and send],
and then press the [ ] button.
●● Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial and select [Select], and then press
the [ ] button.
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
●● Press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons or turn
the [ ] dial to choose an image to
send, press the [ ] button to mark it
as selected ([ ]), and then press the
[
] button.
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
●● Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [OK], and then press the
[ ] button.
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M Mode
●● Press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons or turn
the [ ] dial to choose [Send], and then
press the [ ] button.
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
●● When uploading to YouTube, read the
terms of service, choose [I Agree], and
press the [ ] button.
Setting Menu
●● After the image is sent, [OK] is displayed
on the screen. Press the [ ] button to
return to the playback screen.
Accessories
Appendix
●● Connections require that a memory card with saved images be in
the camera.
●● You can also send multiple images at once, resize images, and
add comments before sending (= 131).
●● You can send the current image by choosing [Send this image] on
the screen in step 3.
●● To look at images sent to CANON iMAGE GATEWAY from your
smartphone, it is recommended that you use the specialized
application Canon Online Photo Album. For iPhone and iPad,
find Canon Online Photo Album in the App Store and download
and install the app. For Android smartphones, find Canon Online
Photo Album in Google Play and download and install the app.
Index
127
Printing Images Wirelessly from a
Connected Printer
Connect the camera to a printer via Wi-Fi to print as follows.
These steps show how to use the camera as an access point, but you can
also use an existing access point (= 118).
1 Access the Wi-Fi menu.
●● Press the [
2 Choose [
] button.
4 Connect the printer to the network.
●● In the printer’s Wi-Fi setting menu,
choose the SSID (network name)
displayed on the camera to establish a
connection.
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
●● In the password field, enter the password
displayed on the camera.
Camera Basics
5 Choose the printer.
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
●● Choose the printer name (either press the
[ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial), and
then press the [ ] button.
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
].
●● Press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons or turn
the [ ] dial to choose [ ], and then
press the [ ] button.
3 Choose [Add a Device].
●● Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [Add a Device], and then
press the [ ] button.
●● The camera’s SSID and password are
displayed.
Tv, Av, and M Mode
6 Choose an image to print.
●● Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [
dial to choose an image.
●● Press the [ ] button, choose [
press the [ ] button again.
]
Playback Mode
], and
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
●● Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [Print], and then press the
[ ] button.
Accessories
●● For detailed printing instructions, see
“Printing Images” (= 153).
●● To end the connection, press the [ ]
button, choose [OK] on the confirmation
screen (either press the [ ][ ] buttons or
turn the [ ] dial), and then press the [ ]
button.
Appendix
Index
128
●● Connections require that a memory card with saved images be in
the camera.
●● Once you have connected to devices via the Wi-Fi menu, recent
destinations will be listed first when you access the Wi-Fi menu.
You can easily connect again by pressing the [ ][ ] buttons to
choose the device and then pressing the [ ] button. To add a
new device, display the device selection screen by pressing the
[ ][ ] buttons, and then configure the setting.
●● If you prefer not to display recent target devices, choose MENU
(= 29) > [ ] tab > [Wireless settings] > [Wi-Fi Settings] >
[Target History] > [Off].
●● To be able to connect without entering the password in step 4
and to make it so that [Password] does not display on the SSID
display screen (step 3), choose MENU (= 29) > [ ] tab >
[Wireless settings] > [Wi-Fi Settings] > [Password] > [Off].
●● To use another access point, follow steps 3 – 4 in “Using Another
Access Point” (= 118).
Sending Images to Another Camera
Connect two cameras via Wi-Fi and send images between them as follows.
●● Only Canon-brand cameras equipped with a Wi-Fi function can
be connected to wirelessly. You cannot connect to a Canon-brand
camera that does not have a Wi-Fi function, even if it supports
FlashAir/Eye-Fi cards.
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
1 Access the Wi-Fi menu.
●● Press the [
2
] button.
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Choose [
].
Tv, Av, and M Mode
●● Press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons or turn
the [ ] dial to choose [ ], and then
press the [ ] button.
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
3 Choose [Add a Device].
Setting Menu
●● Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [Add a Device], and then
press the [ ] button.
●● Follow steps 1 – 3 on the target camera
too.
●● Camera connection information will be
added when [Start connection on target
camera] is displayed on both camera
screens.
Accessories
Appendix
Index
129
4 Send images.
●● Press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons or turn
the [ ] dial to choose [Select and send],
and then press the [ ] button.
●● Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial and select [Select], and then press
the [ ] button.
●● Press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons or turn
the [ ] dial to choose an image to
send, press the [ ] button to mark it
as selected ([ ]), and then press the
[
] button.
●● Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [OK], and then press the
[ ] button.
●● Connections require that a memory card be in the camera.
●● Once you have connected to devices via the Wi-Fi menu, recent
destinations will be listed first when you access the Wi-Fi menu.
You can easily connect again by pressing the [ ][ ] buttons to
choose the device and then pressing the [ ] button. To add a
new device, display the device selection screen by pressing the
[ ][ ] buttons, and then configure the setting.
●● If you prefer not to display recent target devices, choose MENU
(= 29) > [ ] tab > [Wireless settings] > [Wi-Fi Settings] >
[Target History] > [Off].
●● You can also send multiple images at once and change the image
size before sending (= 131).
●● You can send the current image by choosing [Send this image] on
the screen in step 4.
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M Mode
●● Press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons or turn
the [ ] dial to choose [Send], and then
press the [ ] button.
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
●● [Transfer completed] is displayed after
the image is sent, and the image transfer
screen is displayed again.
Setting Menu
●● To end the connection, press the
] button, choose [OK] on the
[
confirmation screen (either press the
[ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial), and
then press the [ ] button.
Accessories
Appendix
Index
130
Selecting a Range
Image Sending Options
Before Use
1 Choose [Select Range].
You can choose multiple images to send at once and change the image
resolution (size) before sending. Some Web services also enable you to
annotate the images you send.
●● Following step 2 in “Sending Multiple
Images” (= 131), choose [Select
Range] and press the [ ] button.
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
2 Choose images.
Sending Multiple Images
On the image transfer screen, you can select a range of images to send,
and send images tagged as favorites.
1 Choose [Select and send].
●● On the image transfer screen, press the
[ ][ ] buttons to choose [Select and
send], and then press the [ ] button.
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
●● Follow steps 2 – 3 in “Selecting a Range”
(= 97) to specify images.
Other Shooting Modes
●● When sending movies as well, press the
[ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons to choose [Incl.
Movies], and then press the [ ] button
to add [ ].
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M Mode
●● Press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons to choose
[OK], and then press the [ ] button.
Playback Mode
3 Send the image.
2 Choose a selection method.
●● Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [
dial to choose a selection method.
]
Wi-Fi Functions
●● Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [Send], and then press the
[ ] button.
Setting Menu
Sending Images Tagged as Favorites
Accessories
You can send images tagged as favorites (= 101).
1 Choose [Favorite Images].
●● Following step 2 in “Sending Multiple
Images” (= 131), choose [Favorite
Images] and press the [ ] button.
Appendix
Index
●● The image selection screen that displays
only favorite images is displayed. To
make it so that an image is not sent, after
choosing an image, press the [ ] button
to remove [ ].
●● Press the [
] button.
131
●● Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [OK], and then press the
[ ] button.
2 Send the image.
●● Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [Send], and then press the
[ ] button.
●● If you have no images tagged as favorite, you cannot choose
[Favorite Images] in step 1.
Notes on Sending Images
●● Depending on the condition of the network you are using, it may take
a long time to send movies. Be sure to keep an eye on the camera
battery level.
●● Web services may limit the number of images or length of movies you
can send.
●● For movies that you do not compress (= 106), a separate,
compressed file is sent instead of the original file. Note that this may
delay transmission, and the file cannot be sent unless there is enough
space for it on the memory card.
●● When sending movies to smartphones, note that the supported image
quality varies depending on the smartphone. For details, refer to the
smartphone user manual.
●● On the screen, wireless signal strength is indicated by the following
icons.
[ ] high, [ ] medium, [ ] low, [ ] weak
●● Sending images to Web services will take less time when resending
images you have already sent that are still on the CANON iMAGE
GATEWAY server.
Choosing the Number of Recording Pixels (Image
Size)
Before Use
On the image transfer screen, choose [ ] by pressing the [ ][ ]
buttons, and then press the [ ] button. On the screen displayed, choose
the resolution (image size) by pressing the [ ][ ] buttons, and then
press the [ ] button.
Advanced Guide
Basic Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
●● To send images at original size, select [No] as the resizing option.
●● By choosing [ ], you can resize images that are larger than the
selected size before sending.
●● Movies cannot be resized.
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
●● Image size can also be configured in MENU (= 29) > [ ] tab >
[Wireless settings] > [Wi-Fi Settings] > [Resize for Sending].
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Playback Mode
Adding Comments
Wi-Fi Functions
Using the camera, you can add comments to images that you send
to e-mail addresses, social networking services, etc. The number of
characters and symbols that can be entered may differ depending on the
Web service.
Setting Menu
Accessories
1 Access the screen for adding
comments.
●● On the image transfer screen, choose
[ ] by pressing the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons,
and then press the [ ] button.
Appendix
Index
2 Add a comment (= 30).
3 Send the image.
132
●● When a comment is not entered, the comment set in CANON
iMAGE GATEWAY is automatically sent.
●● You can also annotate multiple images before sending them. The
same comment is added to all images sent together.
Sending Images Automatically
(Image Sync)
Images on the memory card that have not been transferred already can
be sent to a computer or Web services via CANON iMAGE GATEWAY.
Note that images cannot be sent only to Web services.
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Initial Preparations
Other Shooting Modes
Preparing the Camera
P Mode
Register [ ] as the destination. On the destination computer, install and
set up the Image Sync software “ImageTransfer Utility” (free).
1 Add [
Tv, Av, and M Mode
] as a destination.
Playback Mode
●● Add [ ] as a destination, as described in
“Registering CANON iMAGE GATEWAY”
(= 125).
●● When sending images to the Web
Service as well, log in to CANON iMAGE
GATEWAY (= 125). After choosing the
camera model, display the Web Service
settings screen. Under Image Sync
settings, choose the Web service that you
want to send the images to. For details,
see the CANON iMAGE GATEWAY Help.
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
133
2 Choose the type of images to send
(only when sending movies with
images).
●● Press the [
] button, choose
[Wireless settings] on the [ ] tab, and
then choose [Wi-Fi Settings] (= 29).
●● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose
[Image Sync], and then press the [ ][ ]
buttons to choose [Stills/Movies].
Images sent from the camera are automatically saved to the computer.
If the computer that you intend to send images to is turned off, the images
will be stored temporarily on the CANON iMAGE GATEWAY server.
Stored images are regularly erased, so make sure to turn on the computer
and save the images.
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
1 Send images.
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
●● Following steps 1 – 2 in “Uploading
Images to Web Services” (= 127),
choose [ ].
Preparing the Computer
Install and configure the software on the destination computer.
●● Images labeled with a [
been transferred.
1 Install Image Transfer Utility.
●● Install Image Transfer Utility on a
computer connected to the Internet
(= 151).
P Mode
] icon have
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Playback Mode
●● Images are automatically saved to the
computer when you turn it on.
Wi-Fi Functions
●● Images are automatically sent to Web
services from the CANON iMAGE
GATEWAY server, even if the computer
is off.
2 Register the camera.
●● Windows: In the taskbar, right-click [
and then click [Add new camera].
Other Shooting Modes
2 Save the images to the computer.
●● You can download the Image Transfer
Utility from the CANON iMAGE
GATEWAY Image Sync setting screen
(= 125).
●● Mac OS: In the menu bar, click [
then click [Add new camera].
Before Use
Sending Images
],
●● Once the camera is registered and the
computer is ready to receive images, the
icon changes to [ ].
Accessories
Appendix
●● When sending images, you should use a fully charged battery pack.
], and
●● A list of cameras linked to CANON
iMAGE GATEWAY is displayed. Choose
the camera from which images are to be
sent.
Setting Menu
Index
●● Even if images were imported to the computer through a different
method, any images not sent to the computer via CANON iMAGE
GATEWAY will be sent to the computer.
●● Sending is faster when the destination is a computer on the same
network as the camera, because images are sent via the access
point instead of CANON iMAGE GATEWAY. Note that images
stored on the computer are sent to CANON iMAGE GATEWAY, so
the computer must be connected to the Internet.
134
Viewing Images Sent via Image Sync on Your
Smartphone
When you install Canon Online Photo Album (Canon OPA) on your
smartphone, you can see and download images transferred with Image
Sync and temporarily saved on CANON iMAGE GATEWAY.
The following preparations are required in advance.
●● You must finish the setup process for “Preparing the Computer”
(= 134).
●● For iPhone and iPad, find Canon Online Photo Album in the App Store
and download and install the app. For Android smartphones, find
Canon Online Photo Album in Google Play and download and install
the app.
●● Log in to CANON iMAGE GATEWAY (= 125). After choosing the
camera model, display the Web Service settings screen. Under Image
Sync settings, change the settings so that you can view and download
on your smartphone. For details, see the CANON iMAGE GATEWAY
Help.
●● After a fixed period of time, you will not be able to view images
deleted from CANON iMAGE GATEWAY.
●● To view sent images, you must first set Image Sync settings so
that you can view and download images on your smartphone.
●● For information on Canon Online Photo Album operations, see
the Canon Online Photo Album Help.
Using a Smartphone to View Camera
Images and Control the Camera
You can do the following with the dedicated smartphone app Camera
Connect.
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
●● Browse images on the camera and save them to the smartphone
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
●● Geotag images on the camera (= 135)
●● Shoot remotely (= 136)
Other Shooting Modes
●● Privacy settings must be configured in advance to allow image
viewing on the smartphone (= 116, = 137).
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Geotagging Images on the Camera
Playback Mode
GPS data recorded on a smartphone using the dedicated Camera
Connect application can be added to images on the camera. Images are
tagged with information including the latitude, longitude, and elevation.
●● Before shooting, make sure the date and time and your home
time zone are set correctly, as described in “Setting the Date and
Time” (= 20). Also follow the steps in “World Clock” (= 140)
to specify any shooting destinations in other time zones.
●● Others may be able to locate or identify you by using location data
in your geotagged still images or movies. Be careful when sharing
these images with others, as when posting images online where
many others can view them.
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
135
Shooting Remotely
As you check a shooting screen on your smartphone, you can use it to
shoot remotely.
1
Choose a shooting mode.
●● Turn the mode dial to choose mode of
[ ], [
], [
], or [ ].
2 Secure the camera.
●● Once remote shooting begins, the
camera lens will come out. Lens motion
from zooming may also move the camera
out of position. Keep the camera still by
mounting it on a tripod or taking other
measures.
●● [ ] mode is set when shooting in other than [ ], [
], [
],
and [ ] modes. However, some FUNC. and MENU settings you
have configured in advance may be changed automatically.
●● Movie shooting is not available.
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
●● Any jerky subject motion shown on the smartphone due to the
connection environment will not affect recorded images.
●● No AF frames are displayed. Capture a test image to check the
focus.
●● Captured images are not transferred to the smartphone. Use the
smartphone to browse and import images from the camera.
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Playback Mode
3 Connect the camera and
smartphone (= 116).
Wi-Fi Functions
●● In the privacy settings, choose [Yes].
Setting Menu
4 Choose remote shooting.
Accessories
●● In Camera Connect on the smartphone,
choose remote shooting.
●● The camera lens will come out. Do not
press near the lens, and make sure no
objects will obstruct it.
Appendix
Index
●● Once the camera is ready for remote
shooting, a live image from the camera
will be displayed on the smartphone.
●● At this time, a message is displayed on
the camera, and all operations except
pressing the power button are disabled.
5 Shoot.
●● Use the smartphone to shoot.
136
Editing or Erasing Wi-Fi Settings
Edit or erase Wi-Fi settings as follows.
Editing Connection Information
1 Access the Wi-Fi menu and choose
a device to edit.
●● Press the [ ] button.
●● Press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons or turn
the [ ] dial to choose the icon of a
device to edit, and then press the [ ]
button.
2 Choose [Edit a Device].
●● Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [Edit a Device], and then
press the [ ] button.
3 Choose the device to edit.
●● Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose the device to edit, and then
press the [ ] button.
4 Choose the item to edit.
●● Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose the item to edit, and then
press the [ ] button.
●● The items you can change depend on the
device or service.
Before Use
Connection
Configurable Items
Web
Services
[Change Device Nickname]
(= 137)
O
O
O
O
–
[View Settings] (= 116)
–
O
–
–
–
[Erase Connection Info] (= 137)
O
O
O
O
–
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
O : Configurable – : Not configurable
Other Shooting Modes
Changing a Device Nickname
P Mode
You can change the device nickname (display name) that is displayed on
the camera.
Tv, Av, and M Mode
●● Following step 4 in “Editing Connection
Information” (= 137), choose [Change
Device Nickname] and press the [ ]
button.
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
●● Select the input field and press the [ ]
button. Use the keyboard displayed to
enter a new nickname (= 30).
Setting Menu
Accessories
Erasing Connection Information
Appendix
Erase connection information (information about devices that you have
connected to) as follows.
●● Following step 4 in “Editing Connection
Information” (= 137), choose [Erase
Connection Info] and press the [ ]
button.
Index
●● After [Erase?] is displayed, press the
[ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial to
choose [OK], and then press the [ ]
button.
●● The connection information will be
erased.
137
Changing the Camera Nickname
You can change the nickname of the camera displayed on the connected
device.
1
Choose [Wireless settings].
●● Press the [
] button and choose
[Wireless settings] on the [ ] tab
(= 29).
Returning the Wi-Fi Settings to Default
Before Use
Return the Wi-Fi settings to default if you transfer ownership of the
camera to another person, or dispose of it.
Resetting the Wi-Fi settings will also clear all Web service settings. Be
sure that you want to reset all Wi-Fi settings before using this option.
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
1 Choose [Wireless settings].
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
●● Press the [
] button and choose
[Wireless settings] on the [ ] tab
(= 29).
Other Shooting Modes
2 Choose [Nickname].
●● Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the
[ ] dial to choose [Nickname], and then
press the [ ] button (= 29).
3 Change the device nickname.
●● Press the [ ] button. Use the keyboard
displayed to enter a new nickname
(= 30).
●● A message is displayed if the nickname you enter begins with
a symbol or space. Press the [ ] button and enter a different
nickname.
●● On the [Device Nickname] screen displayed when using the
Wi-Fi function for the first time, choose the field and press [ ] to
display the keyboard. You can then enter a nickname.
P Mode
2 Choose [Reset Settings].
Tv, Av, and M Mode
●● Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [Reset Settings], and then
press the [ ] button.
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
3 Restore the default settings.
Setting Menu
●● Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [OK], and then press the
[ ] button.
Accessories
●● The Wi-Fi settings are now reset.
●● To reset other settings (aside from Wi-Fi) to defaults, choose
[Reset All] on the [ ] tab (= 145).
Appendix
Index
138
Adjusting Basic Camera Functions
Basic camera functions are configured on the [ ] tab of the MENU
(= 29). Customize commonly used functions as desired, for greater
convenience.
Setting Menu
Silencing Camera Operations
Customize or adjust basic camera functions for greater convenience
Silence camera sounds and movies as follows.
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
●● Choose [Mute], and then choose [On].
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
●● Operation can also be silenced by holding down the [
]
button as you turn the camera on.
●● Sound is not played during movies (= 87) if you mute camera
sounds. To restore sound during movies, press the [ ] button.
Adjust volume with the [ ][ ] buttons, as needed.
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Adjusting the Volume
Index
Adjust the volume of individual camera sounds as follows.
●● Choose [Volume], and then press the
[ ] button.
●● Choose an item, and then press the
[ ][ ] buttons to adjust the volume.
139
Before Use
Hiding Hints and Tips
World Clock
Hints and tips are normally shown when you choose FUNC. (= 28) or
MENU (= 29) items. If you prefer, you can deactivate this information.
To ensure that your shots will have the correct local date and time when
you travel abroad, simply register the destination in advance and switch to
that time zone. This convenient feature eliminates the need to change the
Date/Time setting manually.
Before using the world clock, be sure to set the date and time and your
home time zone, as described in “Setting the Date and Time” (= 20).
●● Choose [Hints & Tips], and then choose
[Off].
1
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Specify your destination.
Other Shooting Modes
●● Choose [Time Zone], and then press the
[ ] button.
Date and Time
●● Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [ World], and then press
the [ ] button.
Adjust the date and time as follows.
●● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose the
destination.
●● Choose [Date/Time], and then press the
[ ] button.
●● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose an
option, and then adjust the setting, either
by pressing the [ ][ ] buttons or turning
the [ ] dial.
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Playback Mode
●● To set daylight saving time (1 hour
ahead), choose [ ] by pressing the
[ ][ ] buttons or turning the [ ] dial,
and then choose [ ] by pressing the
[ ][ ] buttons.
●● Press the [
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
] button.
2 Switch to the destination time zone.
●● Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [ World], and then press
the [
] button.
Appendix
Index
●● [ ] is now shown on the shooting screen
(= 166).
●● Adjusting the date or time while in [ ] mode (= 20) will
automatically update your [ Home] time and date.
140
Lens Retraction Timing
The lens is normally retracted for safety about one minute after you press
the [
] button in Shooting mode (= 25). To have the lens retracted
immediately after you press the [
] button, set the retraction timing to
[0 sec.].
●● Choose [Lens Retraction], and then
choose [0 sec.].
2 Shoot.
●● To activate the screen and prepare for
shooting when the screen is off but the
lens is still out, press the shutter button
halfway.
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Power-Saving Adjustment
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Adjust the timing of automatic camera and screen deactivation (Auto
Power Down and Display Off, respectively) as needed (= 26).
Other Shooting Modes
●● Choose [Power Saving], and then press
the [ ] button.
P Mode
●● After choosing an item, press the [ ][ ]
buttons to adjust it as needed.
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Using Eco Mode
Playback Mode
This function allows you to conserve battery power in Shooting mode.
When the camera is not in use, the screen quickly darkens to reduce
battery consumption.
1 Configure the setting.
●● Choose [Eco Mode], and then choose
[On].
] is now shown on the shooting
●● [
screen (= 166).
●● The screen darkens when the camera
is not used for approximately two
seconds; approximately ten seconds
after darkening, the screen turns off.
The camera turns off after approximately
three minutes of inactivity.
Wi-Fi Functions
●● To conserve battery power, you should normally choose [On] for
[Auto Power Down] and [1 min.] or less for [Display Off].
●● The [Display Off] setting is applied even if you set [Auto Power
Down] to [Off].
●● These power-saving functions are not available when you have
set Eco mode (= 141) to [On].
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
141
Screen Brightness
Formatting Memory Cards
Adjust screen brightness as follows.
Before using a new memory card or a card formatted in another device,
you should format the card with this camera.
Formatting erases all data on a memory card. Before formatting, copy
images on the memory card to a computer, or take other steps to back
them up.
●● Choose [Disp. Brightness], and then
press the [ ][ ] buttons to adjust the
brightness.
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
1 Access the [Format] screen.
●● Choose [Format], and then press the [
button.
●● For maximum brightness, press and hold the [
] button
for at least one second when the shooting screen is displayed
or when in single-image display. (This will override the [Disp.
Brightness] setting on the [ ] tab.) To restore the original
] button again for at least
brightness, press and hold the [
one second or restart the camera.
Hiding the Start-Up Screen
If you prefer, you can deactivate display of the start-up screen normally
shown when you turn the camera on.
●● Choose [Start-up Image], and then
choose [Off].
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
]
Other Shooting Modes
2 Choose [OK].
P Mode
●● Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [OK], and then press the
[ ] button.
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
3 Format the memory card.
●● To begin the formatting process, press
the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial
to choose [OK], and then press the [ ]
button.
Setting Menu
●● When formatting is finished, [Memory
card formatting complete] is displayed.
Press the [ ] button.
Appendix
Accessories
Index
●● Formatting or erasing data on a memory card only changes file
management information on the card and does not erase the data
completely. Be careful when transferring or disposing of memory
cards. Take steps to protect personal information if necessary, as
by physically destroying cards.
142
●● The total card capacity indicated on the formatting screen may be
less than the advertised capacity.
Low-Level Formatting
Your shots are automatically numbered in sequential order (0001 – 9999)
and saved in folders that store up to 2,000 images each. You can change
how the camera assigns file numbers.
●● Follow steps 2 – 3 in “Formatting Memory
Cards” (= 142) to continue with the
formatting process.
●● Low-level formatting takes longer than “Formatting Memory
Cards” (= 142), because data is erased from all storage regions
of the memory card.
●● You can cancel low-level formatting in progress by choosing
[Stop]. In this case, all data will be erased, but the memory card
can be used normally.
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
●● Choose [File Numbering], and then
choose an option.
Perform low-level formatting in the following cases: [Memory card error] is
displayed, the camera is not working correctly, card image reading/writing
is slower, continuous shooting is slower, or movie recording suddenly
stops. Low-level formatting erases all data on a memory card. Before lowlevel formatting, copy images on the memory card to a computer, or take
other steps to back them up.
●● On the screen in step 2 of “Formatting
Memory Cards” (= 142), press the
[ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial to
choose [Low Level Format], and then
press the [ ][ ] buttons to select this
option. A [ ] icon is displayed.
Before Use
File Numbering
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Continuous
Auto Reset
Images are numbered consecutively (until the 9999th
shot is taken/saved) even if you switch memory
cards.
Image numbering is reset to 0001 if you switch
memory cards, or when a new folder is created.
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
●● Regardless of the option selected in this setting, shots may be
numbered consecutively after the last number of existing images
on newly inserted memory cards. To start saving shots from 0001,
use an empty or formatted (= 142) memory card.
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
143
Before Use
Date-Based Image Storage
Checking Certification Logos
Instead of saving images in folders created each month, you can have the
camera create folders each day you shoot to store shots taken that day.
Some logos for certification requirements met by the camera can be
viewed on the screen. Other certification logos are printed in this guide, on
the camera packaging, or on the camera body.
●● Choose [Create Folder], and then choose
[Daily].
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
●● Choose [Certification Logo Display], and
then press the [ ] button.
●● Images will now be saved in folders
created on the shooting date.
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
Metric / Non-Metric Display
Change the unit of measurement shown in the zoom bar (= 32), the
MF indicator (= 75), and elsewhere from m/cm to ft/in as needed.
●● Choose [Units], and then choose [ft/in].
P Mode
Display Language
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Change the display language as needed.
●● Choose [Language
the [ ] button.
Playback Mode
], and then press
Wi-Fi Functions
●● Press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons or turn
the [ ] dial to choose a language, and
then press the [ ] button.
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
●● You can also access the [Language] screen in Playback mode by
pressing and holding the [ ] button and immediately pressing
] button.
the [
Index
144
Before Use
Adjusting Other Settings
The following settings can also be adjusted on the [
] tab.
●● [Video System] (= 148)
●● [Wireless settings] (= 112)
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Restoring Default Camera Settings
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
If you accidentally change a setting, you can restore default camera
settings.
Other Shooting Modes
1 Access the [Reset All] screen.
P Mode
●● Choose [Reset All], and then press the
[ ] button.
Tv, Av, and M Mode
2 Restore default settings.
Playback Mode
●● Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [OK], and then press the
[ ] button.
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
●● Default settings are now restored.
●● The following functions are not restored to default settings.
-- Information registered using Face ID (= 44)
-- [ ] tab settings [Date/Time] (= 140), [Time Zone] (= 140),
] (= 144), and [Video System] (= 148)
[Language
-- Custom white balance data you have recorded (= 73)
] (= 59).
-- Shooting mode chosen in [
-- Movie mode (= 66)
-- Wi-Fi settings (= 112)
Accessories
Appendix
Index
145
Before Use
System Map
Basic Guide
Included Accessories
Advanced Guide
Accessories
Wrist Strap
Battery Pack
NB-13L*1
Battery Charger
CB-2LH/CB-2LHE*1
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Enjoy the camera in more ways with optional Canon accessories and
other compatible accessories sold separately
USB Cable (camera end: Micro-B)*2
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Memory Card
Card Reader
Computer
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Playback Mode
HDMI Cable
(camera end: Type D)*3
TV/
Video System
PictBridge-Compatible Printers
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Power
Accessories
Connect Station
CS100*4
Compact Power
Adapter
CA-DC30/CA-DC30E
*1
*2
*3
*4
Appendix
Index
Also available for purchase separately.
A genuine Canon accessory is also available (Interface Cable IFC-600PCU).
Use a commercially available cable no longer than 2.5 m (8.2 ft.).
Use latest firmware.
146
Use of genuine Canon accessories is recommended.
This product is designed to achieve excellent performance when used
with genuine Canon accessories.
Canon shall not be liable for any damage to this product and/or accidents
such as fire, etc., caused by the malfunction of non-genuine Canon
accessories (e.g., a leakage and/or explosion of a battery pack). Please
note that this warranty does not apply to repairs arising out of the
malfunction of non-genuine Canon accessories, although you may request
such repairs on a chargeable basis.
Optional Accessories
The following camera accessories are sold separately. Note that
availability varies by area, and some accessories may no longer be
available.
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Power Supplies
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
Battery Pack NB-13L
●● Rechargeable lithium-ion battery
P Mode
Battery Charger CB-2LH/CB-2LHE
Tv, Av, and M Mode
●● Charger for Battery Pack NB-13L
●● The battery charger can be used in areas with 100 – 240 V AC
power (50/60 Hz).
●● For power outlets in a different format, use a commercially
available adapter for the plug. Never use an electrical transformer
designed for traveling, which may damage the battery pack.
●● The message [Battery communication error] is displayed if you
use a non-genuine Canon battery pack, and user response is
required. Note that Canon shall not be liable for any damages
resulting from accidents, such as malfunction or fire, that occur
due to use of non-genuine Canon battery packs.
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
●● The battery pack includes a convenient cover which you can
attach to know the charge status at a glance. Attach the cover so
is visible on a charged battery pack, and attach it so that
that
is not visible on an uncharged battery pack.
147
Compact Power Adapter
CA-DC30/CA-DC30E
●● Insert the included battery pack into the
camera for charging. Interface Cable IFC600PCU (sold separately) is required to
connect the adapter to the camera.
 Still Images Printers
Basic Guide
Playback on a TV
Camera Basics
 Still Images ●● For connecting the camera to a computer
or printer.
 Movies
Advanced Guide
Other Accessories
Interface Cable IFC-600PCU
Before Use
Using Optional Accessories
 Movies
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
By connecting the camera to a TV, you can view your shots on the larger
screen of the TV.
For details on connection or how to switch inputs, refer to the TV manual.
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
●● Some information may not be displayed when viewing images on
a TV (= 167).
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Playback Mode
Playback on a High-Definition TV
 Still Images Canon-Brand PictBridge-Compatible
Printers
●● Even without using a computer, you can
print images by connecting the camera
directly to a printer.
For details, visit your nearest Canon
retailer.
 Movies
Wi-Fi Functions
You can view your shots on a TV by connecting the camera to an HDTV
with a commercially available HDMI cable (not exceeding 2.5 m / 8.2
ft., with a Type D terminal on the camera end). Movies shot at an image
quality of [
], [
], or [
] can be viewed in high definition.
Setting Menu
Accessories
1 Make sure the camera and TV are
Appendix
off.
2 Connect the camera to the TV.
Index
●● On the TV, insert the cable plug fully into
the HDMI input as shown.
Photo Storage
Connect Station CS100
●● A media hub for storing camera images,
viewing on a connected TV, printing
wirelessly on a Wi-Fi-compatible printer,
sharing over the Internet, and more.
148
●● On the camera, open the terminal cover
and insert the cable plug fully into the
camera terminal.
Inserting and Charging the Battery
Pack
Charge the battery pack by using the supplied battery pack with an
optional Compact Power Adapter CA-DC30/CA-DC30E or Interface Cable
IFC-600PCU.
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
●● Follow step 1 in “Inserting the
Battery Pack and Your Memory Card
(Commercially Available)” (= 18) to
open the cover.
external input.
●● Switch the TV input to the external input
you connected the cable to in step 2.
4 Turn the camera on.
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
●● Insert the battery pack as described in
step 2 of “Inserting the Battery Pack
and Your Memory Card (Commercially
Available)” (= 19).
] button to turn the camera
●● Images from the camera are now
displayed on the TV. (Nothing is
displayed on the camera screen.)
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Playback Mode
●● Follow step 3 in “Inserting the
Battery Pack and Your Memory Card
(Commercially Available)” (= 19) to
close the cover.
●● When finished, turn off the camera and
TV before disconnecting the cable.
●● Camera operating sounds are not played while the camera is
connected to an HDTV.
Basic Guide
1 Insert the battery pack.
3 Turn the TV on and switch to
●● Press the [
on.
Before Use
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
2 Connect the compact power adapter
(2)
(1)
Accessories
to the camera.
●● With the camera turned off, open the
cover (1). Hold the smaller plug of the
interface cable (sold separately) facing
as shown and insert the plug fully into the
camera terminal (2).
Appendix
Index
●● Insert the larger plug of the interface
cable into the compact power adapter.
149
3 Charge the battery pack.
●● CA-DC30: Flip out the plug (1) and plug
the compact power adapter into a power
outlet (2).
●● CA-DC30E: Plug the power cord into the
compact power adapter, then plug the
other end into a power outlet.
●● Charging begins and the USB charge
lamp lights up.
●● The lamp turns off when charging
finishes.
●● Remove the compact power adapter from
the power outlet and the interface cable
from the camera.
●● To protect the battery pack and keep it in optimal condition, do not
charge it continuously for more than 24 hours.
●● Before charging a different battery, make sure to remove the
interface cable from the camera and then replace the battery.
●● For details on charging time and the number of shots and
recording time possible with a fully charged battery pack, see
“Number of Shots/Recording Time, Playback Time” (= 178).
●● You can view images even while the battery is charging, by
turning the camera on and entering Playback mode (= 23).
However, you cannot shoot while the battery is charging.
●● If the USB charge lamp does not light up, remove the interface
cable from the camera and plug it again.
●● Charged battery packs gradually lose their charge, even when
they are not used. Charge the battery pack on (or immediately
before) the day of use.
●● The charger can be used in areas with 100 – 240 V AC power
(50/60 Hz). For power outlets in a different format, use a
commercially available adapter for the plug. Never use an
electrical transformer designed for traveling, which may damage
the battery pack.
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Playback Mode
Using a Computer to Charge the Battery
Wi-Fi Functions
You can also charge the battery pack by inserting the larger plug of the
interface cable into a computer’s USB terminal in step 2 of “Inserting and
Charging the Battery Pack” (= 149). For details about USB connections
on the computer, refer to the computer user manual.
●● Charging is not possible when the camera is off.
●● With some computers, battery charging may require the memory
card to be in the camera. Insert the memory card in the camera
(= 18) before connecting the cable to the computer’s USB port.
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
150
Using the Software
To utilize the features of the following software, download the software
from the Canon website and install it on your computer.
Using a USB cable (sold separately; camera end: Micro-B), you can
connect the camera to the computer and save images to the computer.
1
●● CameraWindow
-- Import images to your computer
●● Image Transfer Utility
-- Set up Image Sync (= 133) and receive images
●● Map Utility
-- Use a map to view GPS information that has been added to images
●● To view and edit images on a computer, use preinstalled or
commonly available software compatible with images taken with
the camera.
Computer Connections via a Cable
Checking Your Computer Environment
For detailed system requirements and compatibility information, including
support in new operating systems on the computers on which the software
is used, visit the Canon website.
Installing the Software
For software installation instructions, see “Installing the Software”
(= 119).
Before Use
Saving Images to a Computer
(2)
(1)
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Connect the camera to the
computer.
Camera Basics
●● With the camera turned off, open the
cover (1). With the smaller plug of the
USB cable in the orientation shown,
insert the plug fully into the camera
terminal (2).
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
●● Insert the larger plug of the USB cable
in the computer’s USB port. For details
about USB connections on the computer,
refer to the computer user manual.
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Playback Mode
2 Turn the camera on to access
Wi-Fi Functions
CameraWindow.
●● Press the [
on.
Setting Menu
] button to turn the camera
Accessories
●● Mac OS: CameraWindow is displayed
when a connection is established
between the camera and computer.
●● Windows: Follow the steps introduced
below.
Appendix
Index
●● In the screen that is displayed, click the
] link to modify the program.
[
151
●● Choose [Downloads Images From Canon
Camera] and then click [OK].
●● Double-click [
].
3 Save the images to the computer.
●● Click [Import Images from Camera], and
then click [Import Untransferred Images].
●● Windows 7: If the screen in step 2 is not displayed, click the [ ]
icon in the taskbar.
●● Mac OS: If CameraWindow is not displayed after step 2, click the
[CameraWindow] icon in the Dock.
●● Although you can save images to a computer simply by
connecting your camera to the computer without using the
software, the following limitations apply.
-- It may take a few minutes after you connect the camera to the
computer until camera images are accessible.
-- Images shot in vertical orientation may be saved in horizontal
orientation.
-- Image protection settings may be cleared from images saved
to a computer.
-- Some problems may occur when saving images or image
information, depending on the operating system version, the
software in use, or image file sizes.
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M Mode
●● Images are now saved to the Pictures
folder on the computer, in separate
folders named by date.
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
●● After images are saved, close
] button to
CameraWindow, press the [
turn the camera off, and unplug the cable.
Setting Menu
●● To view images you save to a computer,
use preinstalled or commonly available
software compatible with images
captured by the camera.
Accessories
Appendix
Index
152
4 Turn the camera on.
Printing Images
 Still Images  Movies
Your shots can easily be printed by connecting the camera to a printer.
On the camera, you can specify images to set up batch printing, prepare
orders for photo development services, and prepare orders or print
images for photobooks.
A Canon SELPHY CP series compact photo printer is used here for the
sake of illustration. Screens displayed and available functions vary by
printer. Also refer to the printer manual for additional information.
Easy Print
 Still Images  Movies
Print your shots by connecting the camera to a PictBridge-compatible
printer with a USB cable (sold separately; camera end: Micro-B).
1 Make sure the camera and printer
are off.
2 Connect the camera to the printer.
●● Open the terminal cover. Holding the
smaller cable plug in the orientation
shown, insert the plug fully into the
camera terminal.
●● Connect the larger cable plug to the
printer. For other connection details, refer
to the printer manual.
●● Press the [
on.
Before Use
] button to turn the camera
Advanced Guide
5 Choose an image.
●● Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [
dial to choose an image.
6
Basic Guide
Camera Basics
]
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Access the printing screen.
●● Press the [ ] button, choose [
press the [ ] button again.
Other Shooting Modes
], and
P Mode
7 Print the image.
Tv, Av, and M Mode
●● Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [Print], and then press the
[ ] button.
Playback Mode
●● Printing now begins.
Wi-Fi Functions
●● To print other images, repeat the above
procedures starting from step 5 after
printing is finished.
Setting Menu
●● When you are finished printing, turn the
camera and printer off and disconnect
the cable.
●● For Canon-brand PictBridge-compatible printers (sold separately),
see “Printers” (= 148).
Accessories
Appendix
Index
3 Turn the printer on.
153
Cropping Images before Printing
Configuring Print Settings
 Still Images  Movies
1 Access the printing screen.
●● Follow steps 1 – 6 in “Easy Print”
(= 153) to access this screen.
2 Configure the settings.
●● Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose an item, and then choose
an option by pressing the [ ][ ] buttons.
Default
Date
File No.
Both
Off
Default
Off
On
Red-Eye 1
No. of
Copies
Cropping
–
Paper
Settings
–
Before Use
 Still Images Matches current printer settings.
Prints images with the date added.
Prints images with the file number added.
Prints images with both the date and file
number added.
–
Matches current printer settings.
–
Uses information from the time of shooting to
print under optimal settings.
Corrects red-eye.
Choose the number of copies to print.
Specify a desired image area to print
(= 154).
Specify the paper size, layout, and other
details (= 155).
 Movies
By cropping images before printing, you can print a desired image area
instead of the entire image.
1 Choose [Cropping].
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
●● After following step 1 in “Configuring Print
Settings” (= 154) to access the printing
screen, choose [Cropping] and press the
[ ] button.
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
●● A cropping frame is now displayed,
indicating the image area to print.
P Mode
2 Adjust the cropping frame as
needed.
Tv, Av, and M Mode
●● To resize the frame, move the zoom lever.
Playback Mode
●● To move the frame, press the
[ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons.
●● To rotate the frame, press the [
button.
●● When finished, press the [
Wi-Fi Functions
]
Setting Menu
] button.
3 Print the image.
Accessories
●● Follow step 7 in “Easy Print” (= 153)
to print.
Appendix
Index
●● Cropping may not be possible at small image sizes, or at some
aspect ratios.
154
Choosing Paper Size and Layout before Printing
 Still Images Available Layout Options
 Movies
1 Choose [Paper Settings].
●● After following step 1 in “Configuring Print
Settings” (= 154) to access the printing
screen, choose [Paper Settings] and
press the [ ] button.
ID Photo
Fixed Size
2 Choose a paper size.
●● Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose an option, and then press
the [ ] button.
3
Default
Bordered
Borderless
N-up
Before Use
Matches current printer settings.
Prints with blank space around the image.
Borderless, edge-to-edge printing.
Choose how many images to print per sheet.
Prints images for identification purposes.
Only available for images with a resolution of L and an
aspect ratio of 4:3.
Choose the print size.
Choose from 3.5 x 5 in., postcard, or wide-format prints.
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Printing ID Photos
 Still Images  Movies
Tv, Av, and M Mode
1 Choose [ID Photo].
Choose a type of paper.
●● Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose an option, and then press
the [ ] button.
]
●● When choosing [N-up], press the [ ][ ]
buttons to specify the number of images
per sheet.
●● Press the [
] button.
5 Print the image.
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
2 Choose the long and short side
Accessories
length.
4 Choose a layout.
●● Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [
dial to choose an option.
Playback Mode
●● Following steps 1 – 4 in “Choosing
Paper Size and Layout before Printing”
(= 155), choose [ID Photo] and press
the [ ] button.
●● Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose an item. Choose the length
by pressing the [ ][ ] buttons, and then
press the [ ] button.
Appendix
Index
3 Choose the printing area.
●● Follow step 2 in “Cropping Images before
Printing” (= 154) to choose the printing
area.
4 Print the image.
155
Printing Movie Scenes
 Still Images  Movies
1 Access the printing screen.
●● Follow steps 1 – 6 in “Easy Print”
(= 153) to choose a movie. The screen
at left is displayed.
2 Choose a printing method.
●● Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the
[ ] dial to choose [ ], and then press
the [ ][ ] buttons to choose the printing
method.
 Still Images  Still Images Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
 Movies
Specify the printing format, whether to add the date or file number, and
other settings as follows. These settings apply to all images in the print list.
P Mode
●● Press the [
] button, and then
choose [Print Settings] on the [ ] tab.
Choose and configure items as desired
(= 29).
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Prints the current scene as a still image.
Prints a series of scenes, a certain interval apart, on
a single sheet of paper. You can also print the folder
number, file number, and elapsed time for the frame by
setting [Caption] to [On].
Setting Menu
Standard
Print Type
●● To cancel printing in progress, press the [ ] button, choose [OK],
and then press the [ ] button again.
●● The screen in step 1 can also be displayed by the following
procedure: display the movie scene to be printed following steps
2 – 5 in “Viewing” (= 87), press the [ ][ ] buttons to select
[ ] from the movie control panel, and then press [ ].
Basic Guide
Configuring Print Settings
Movie Printing Options
Sequence
 Movies
Batch printing (= 158) and ordering prints from a photo development
service can be set up on the camera. Choose up to 998 images on a
memory card and configure relevant settings, such as the number of
copies, as follows. The printing information you prepare this way will
conform to DPOF (Digital Print Order Format) standards.
3 Print the image.
Single
Before Use
Adding Images to the Print List (DPOF)
Index
Both
Date
File No.
Clear
DPOF data
On
Off
On
Off
On
Off
One image is printed per sheet.
Smaller versions of multiple images are
printed per sheet.
Both standard and index formats are
printed.
Images are printed with the shooting date.
–
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Images are printed with the file number.
–
All image print list settings are cleared
after printing.
–
156
●● Not all of your DPOF settings may be applied in printing by the
printer or photo development service, in some cases.
●● [ ] may be displayed on the camera to warn you that the
memory card has print settings that were configured on another
camera. Changing the print settings using this camera may
overwrite all previous settings.
●● Specifying [Index] will prevent you from choosing [On] for both
[Date] and [File No.] at the same time.
●● Index printing is not available on some Canon-brand PictBridgecompatible printers (sold separately).
●● The date is printed in a format matching setting details in [Date/
Time] on the [ ] tab (= 20).
 Movies
1 Choose [Select Images & Qty.].
●● Press the [
] button, choose
[Select Images & Qty.] on the [ ] tab,
and then press the [ ] button.
2 Choose an image.
●● Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose an image, and then press
the [ ] button.
●● You can now specify the number of
copies.
●● If you specify index printing for the
image, it is labeled with a [ ] icon. To
cancel index printing for the image, press
the [ ] button again. [ ] is no longer
displayed.
Before Use
●● Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to specify the number of prints (up
to 99).
●● To set up printing for other images and
specify the number of prints, repeat
steps 2 – 3.
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
●● Printing quantity cannot be specified for
index prints. You can only choose which
images to print, by following step 2.
●● When finished, press the [
to return to the menu screen.
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
] button
P Mode
Setting Up Printing for a Range of Images
 Still Images Setting Up Printing for Individual Images
 Still Images 3 Specify the number of prints.
Tv, Av, and M Mode
 Movies
●● Following step 1 in “Setting Up Printing
for Individual Images” (= 157), choose
[Select Range] and press the [ ] button.
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
●● Follow steps 2 – 3 in “Selecting a Range”
(= 97) to specify images.
Setting Menu
●● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose
[Order], and then press the [ ] button.
Accessories
Setting Up Printing for All Images
 Still Images Appendix
 Movies
●● Following step 1 in “Setting Up Printing
for Individual Images” (= 157), choose
[Select All Images] and press the [ ]
button.
Index
●● Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [OK], and then press the
[ ] button.
157
Clearing All Images from the Print List
●● Following step 1 in “Setting Up Printing
for Individual Images” (= 157), choose
[Clear All Selections] and press the [ ]
button.
●● Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [OK], and then press the
[ ] button.
Printing Images Added to the Print List (DPOF)
 Still Images  Movies
●● When images have been added to the
print list (= 156 – = 157), this screen
is displayed after you connect the camera
to a PictBridge-compatible printer. Press
the [ ][ ] buttons to choose [Print now],
and then simply press the [ ] button to
print the images in the print list.
●● Any DPOF print job that you temporarily
stop will be resumed from the next image.
Before Use
Adding Images to a Photobook
 Still Images  Movies
Photobooks can be set up on the camera by choosing up to 998 images
on a memory card and importing them into the software on your computer,
where they are stored in their own folder. This is convenient when ordering
printed photobooks online or printing photobooks with your own printer.
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Choosing a Selection Method
●● Press the [
] button, choose
[Photobook Set-up] on the [
] tab, and
then choose how you will select images.
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Playback Mode
●● [ ] may be displayed on the camera to warn you that the
memory card has print settings that were configured on another
camera. Changing the print settings using this camera may
overwrite all previous settings.
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Adding Images Individually
 Still Images Appendix
 Movies
1 Choose [Select].
Index
●● Following the procedure in “Choosing
a Selection Method” (= 158), choose
[Select] and press the [ ] button.
158
2 Choose an image.
Before Use
●● Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose an image, and then press
the [ ] button.
●● [
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
] is displayed.
●● To remove the image from the photobook,
press the [ ] button again. [ ] is no
longer displayed.
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
●● Repeat this process to specify other
images.
●● When finished, press the [
to return to the menu screen.
Other Shooting Modes
] button
P Mode
Adding All Images to a Photobook
 Still Images Tv, Av, and M Mode
 Movies
●● Following the procedure in “Choosing
a Selection Method” (= 158), choose
[Select All Images] and press the
[ ] button.
Playback Mode
●● Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [OK], and then press the
[ ] button.
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Removing All Images from a Photobook
 Still Images Wi-Fi Functions
 Movies
Index
●● Following the procedure in “Choosing
a Selection Method” (= 158), choose
[Clear All Selections] and press the
[ ] button.
●● Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [OK], and then press the
[ ] button.
159
Troubleshooting
If you think there is a problem with the camera, first check the following.
If the items below do not solve your problem, contact a Canon Customer
Support Help Desk.
Appendix
Helpful information when using the camera
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Power
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Nothing happens when the power button is pressed.
●●
●●
●●
●●
Confirm that the battery pack is charged (= 18).
Confirm that the battery pack is inserted facing the correct way (= 18).
Confirm that the memory card/battery cover is fully closed (= 18).
Dirty battery terminals reduce battery performance. Try cleaning the terminals
with a cotton swab and reinserting the battery pack a few times.
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M Mode
The battery pack runs out of power quickly.
●● Battery performance decreases at low temperatures. Try warming the battery
pack a little by putting it in your pocket, for example, ensuring that the terminals
do not touch any metal objects.
●● Dirty battery terminals reduce battery performance. Try cleaning the terminals
with a cotton swab and reinserting the battery pack a few times.
●● If these measures do not help and the battery pack still runs out of power soon
after charging, it has reached the end of its life. Purchase a new battery pack.
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
The lens is not retracted.
Accessories
●● Do not open the memory card/battery cover while the camera is on. Close the
cover, turn the camera on, and then turn it off again (= 18).
Appendix
The battery pack is swollen.
●● Battery swelling is normal and does not pose any safety concerns. However, if
battery swelling prevents the battery pack from fitting in the camera, contact a
Canon Customer Support Help Desk.
Index
Display on a TV
Camera images look distorted or are not displayed on a TV (= 148).
160
Shooting
Subjects look too bright, highlights are washed-out.
Lower the flash and set the flash mode to [ ] (= 32).
Adjust brightness by using exposure compensation (= 71).
Use AE lock or spot metering (= 71, = 71).
Reduce the lighting on subjects.
●● In Playback mode (= 87), press the shutter button halfway (= 26).
●●
●●
●●
●●
Strange display on the screen under low light (= 27).
Shots look too dark despite the flash firing (= 35).
Cannot shoot.
Strange display on the screen when shooting.
●● Note that the following display problems are not recorded in still images but are
recorded in movies.
-- The screen may flicker and horizontal banding may appear under fluorescent
or LED lighting.
Full-screen display is not available while shooting (= 49).
[ ] flashes on the screen when the shutter button is pressed, and shooting
is not possible (= 35).
[
●●
●●
●●
●●
] is displayed when the shutter button is pressed halfway (= 35).
Set [IS Mode] to [Continuous] (= 83).
Raise the flash and set the flash mode to [ ] (= 81).
Increase the ISO speed (= 72).
Mount the camera on a tripod or take other measures to keep it still. Additionally,
you should set [IS Mode] to [Off] when using a tripod or other means to secure
the camera (= 83).
Shots are out of focus.
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
White spots appear in flash shots.
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Shots look grainy.
Playback Mode
P Mode
●● This is caused by light from the flash reflecting off dust or airborne particles.
●● Lower the ISO speed (= 72).
●● High ISO speeds in some shooting modes may cause grainy images (= 59).
Wi-Fi Functions
Subjects are affected by red-eye.
Setting Menu
●● Set [Red-Eye Lamp] to [On] (= 54). The red-eye reduction lamp (= 4)
will light up for flash shots. For best results, have subjects look at the red-eye
reduction lamp. Also try increasing the lighting in indoor scenes and shooting at
closer range.
●● Edit images using red-eye correction (= 104).
Shooting settings or FUNC. menu settings are not available.
Raise the flash and set the flash mode to [ ] (= 81).
Adjust brightness by using exposure compensation (= 71).
Adjust contrast by using i-Contrast (= 72, = 104).
Use AE lock or spot metering (= 71, = 71).
Camera Basics
●● Shoot within flash range (= 177).
●● Lower the flash and set the flash mode to [ ] (= 32).
●● Adjust brightness by using flash exposure compensation or changing the flash
output level (= 82, = 86).
No AF frames are displayed and the camera does not focus when the
shutter button is pressed halfway.
●●
●●
●●
●●
Advanced Guide
Subjects in flash shots look too bright, highlights are washed-out.
Recording to the memory card takes too long, or continuous shooting is
slower.
Subjects in shots look too dark.
Basic Guide
●● Shoot within flash range (= 177).
●● Adjust brightness by using flash exposure compensation or changing the flash
output level (= 82, = 86).
●● Increase the ISO speed (= 72).
●● Press the shutter button halfway to focus on subjects before pressing it all the
way down to shoot (= 26).
●● Make sure subjects are within focusing range (= 178).
●● Set [AF-assist Beam] to [On] (= 53).
●● Confirm that unneeded functions such as macro are deactivated.
●● Try shooting with focus lock or AF lock (= 77, = 80).
●● To have AF frames displayed and the camera focus correctly, try composing the
shot with higher-contrast subject areas centered before you press the shutter
button halfway. Otherwise, try pressing the shutter button halfway repeatedly.
Before Use
●● Use the camera to perform low-level formatting of the memory card (= 143).
Accessories
Appendix
Index
●● Available setting items vary by shooting mode. Refer to “Functions Available in
Each Shooting Mode”, “FUNC. Menu”, and “Shooting Tab” (= 168 – = 171).
The Babies or Children icon does not display.
●● The Babies and Children icons will not display if the birthday is not set in face
information (= 44). If the icons still do not display even when you set the
birthday, re-register face information (= 45), or make sure that the date/time
are set correctly (= 140).
161
Cannot access the Story Highlights home screen by pressing the
[ ] button.
Shooting Movies
The elapsed time shown is incorrect, or recording is interrupted.
●● Use the camera to format the memory card, or switch to a card that supports
high-speed recording. Note that even if the elapsed time display is incorrect, the
length of movies on the memory card corresponds to the actual recording time
(= 142, = 179).
[
] is displayed and shooting stops automatically.
●● The camera’s internal memory buffer filled up as the camera could not record to
the memory card quickly enough. Try one of the following measures.
-- Use the camera to perform low-level formatting of the memory card (= 143).
-- Lower the image quality (= 50).
-- Switch to a memory card that supports high-speed recording (= 179).
Zooming is not possible.
●● Zooming is not possible when shooting movies in [
] (= 57) modes.
and [
] (= 61), [
] (= 68),
Subjects look distorted.
●● Subjects that pass in front of the camera quickly may look distorted. This is not a
malfunction.
Playback
Playback is not possible.
●● Image or movie playback may not be possible if a computer is used to rename
files or alter the folder structure.
●● Home screen display is not possible when connected to a printer. Disconnect the
camera from the printer.
●● Home screen display is not possible during Wi-Fi connections. End the Wi-Fi
connection.
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
A desired subject icon for an album is not displayed on the Story
Highlights home screen.
Camera Basics
●● In simple information display mode (= 88), choose an image that shows the
name of the person for the album before accessing the Story Highlights home
screen (= 108).
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
Memory Card
P Mode
The memory card is not recognized.
●● Restart the camera, with the memory card in it (= 25).
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Computer
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Cannot transfer images to a computer.
●● When attempting to transfer images to the computer via a cable, try reducing the
transfer speed as follows.
] button to enter Playback mode. Hold the [
] button
-- Press the [
down as you press the [ ] and [ ] buttons at the same time. On the next
screen, press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose [B], and then press the [ ] button.
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Playback stops, or audio skips.
●● Switch to a memory card that you have performed low-level formatting on with the
camera (= 143).
●● There may be brief interruptions when playing movies copied to memory cards
that have slow read speeds.
●● When movies are played on a computer, frames may be dropped and audio may
skip if computer performance is inadequate.
Index
Sound is not played during movies.
●● Adjust the volume (= 139) if you have activated [Mute] (= 139) or the sound
in the movie is faint.
]
●● No sound is played for movies shot in [ ] (= 61), [ ] (= 68), or [
(= 57) mode because audio is not recorded in these modes.
162
Images take a long time to send./The wireless connection is disrupted.
Wi-Fi
Cannot access the Wi-Fi menu by pressing the [
] button.
●● The Wi-Fi menu cannot be displayed while the camera is connected to a printer
or computer via a cable. Disconnect the cable.
Cannot add a device/destination.
●● A total of 20 items of connection information can be added to the camera. Erase
unneeded connection information from the camera first, and then add new
devices/destinations (= 137).
●● Use a computer or smartphone to register Web services (= 124).
●● To add a smartphone, first install the dedicated application Camera Connect on
your smartphone (= 116).
●● To add a computer, first install the software CameraWindow on your computer.
Also check your computer and Wi-Fi environment and settings (= 119,
= 120).
●● Do not use the camera near sources of Wi-Fi signal interference, such as
microwave ovens, Bluetooth devices, or other equipment operating on the
2.4 GHz band.
●● Bring the camera closer to the other device you are trying to connect to (such as
the access point), and make sure there are no objects between the devices.
●● Multiple images may take a long time to send. Try resizing the image to reduce
sending time (= 132).
●● Movies may take a long time to send.
●● Do not use the camera near sources of Wi-Fi signal interference, such as
microwave ovens, Bluetooth devices, or other equipment operating on the
]
2.4 GHz band. Note that images may take a long time to send even when [
is displayed.
●● Bring the camera closer to the other device you are trying to connect to (such as
the access point), and make sure there are no objects between the devices.
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
No notification message is received on a computer or smartphone after
adding CANON iMAGE GATEWAY to the camera.
Other Shooting Modes
●● Make sure the e-mail address you entered is correct, and try adding the
destination again.
●● Check the e-mail settings on the computer or smartphone. If they are configured
to block email from certain domains, you may not be able to receive the
notification message.
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Want to erase Wi-Fi connection information before disposing of the
camera or giving it to someone else.
Playback Mode
●● Reset the Wi-Fi settings (= 138).
Wi-Fi Functions
Cannot connect to the access point.
●● Confirm that the access point channel is set to a channel supported by the
camera (= 177). Note that instead of auto channel assignment, it is advisable to
specify a supported channel manually.
Setting Menu
Cannot send images.
Accessories
●● The destination device has insufficient storage space. Increase the storage space
on the destination device and resend the images.
●● The write-protect switch of the memory card in the destination camera is set to
the locked position. Slide the write-protect switch to the unlocked position.
●● Images are not sent to CANON iMAGE GATEWAY or other Web services if you
move or rename image files or folders on the computer that received images sent
using Image Sync via an access point (= 133). Before moving or renaming
these image files or folders on the computer, make sure the images have already
been sent to CANON iMAGE GATEWAY or other Web services.
Appendix
Index
Cannot resize images for sending.
●● Images cannot be resized to be bigger than the resolution setting of their original
size.
●● Movies cannot be resized.
163
On-Screen Messages
If an error message is displayed, respond as follows.
Shooting or Playback
No memory card
●● The memory card may be inserted facing the wrong way. Reinsert the memory
card facing the correct way (= 18).
Memory card locked
●● The write-protect switch of the memory card is set to the locked position. Switch
the write-protect switch to the unlocked position (= 18).
Cannot record!
●● Shooting was attempted without a memory card in the camera. To shoot, insert a
memory card facing the correct way (= 18).
Memory card error (= 143)
●● If the same error message is displayed even after you have formatted a
supported memory card (= 2) and have inserted it facing the correct way
(= 18), contact a Canon Customer Support Help Desk.
Insufficient space on card
●● There is not enough free space on the memory card to shoot (= 32, = 56,
= 70, = 84) or edit images (= 102). Either erase unneeded images
(= 98) or insert a memory card with enough free space (= 18).
Charge the battery (= 18)
No Image.
●● The memory card does not contain any images that can be displayed.
Protected! (= 96)
Unidentified Image/Incompatible JPEG/Image too large./Cannot play back
MOV/Cannot play back MP4
●● Unsupported or corrupt images cannot be displayed.
●● It may not be possible to display images that were edited or renamed on a
computer, or images shot with another camera.
Cannot magnify!/Cannot play back this content in Smart Shuffle/Cannot
rotate/Cannot modify image/Cannot modify/Cannot assign to category/
Unselectable image./No identification information
●● The following functions may be unavailable for images that were renamed or
already edited on a computer, or images shot with another camera. Note that
starred (*) functions are not available for movies.
Edit ID Info (= 93) *, Magnify (= 94) *, Smart Shuffle (= 95) *, Rotate
(= 100) *, Favorites (= 101) , Edit (= 102) *, Print List (= 156) *, and
Photobook Set-up (= 158) *
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Invalid selection range
●● When specifying a range for image selection (= 97, = 99, = 157), you
attempted to choose an initial image that was after the final image, or vice-versa.
Other Shooting Modes
Exceeded selection limit
●● More than 998 images were selected for Print List (= 156) or Photobook Set-up
(= 158). Choose 998 images or less.
●● Print List (= 156) or Photobook Set-up (= 158) settings could not be saved
correctly. Reduce the number of selected images and try again.
●● You attempted to choose more than 500 images in Protect (= 96), Erase
(= 98), Favorites (= 101), Print List (= 156), or Photobook Set-up
(= 158).
P Mode
Naming error!
Wi-Fi Functions
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Playback Mode
●● The folder could not be created or images could not be recorded, because the
highest supported folder number (999) for storing images on the card has been
reached and the highest supported image number (9999) for images in folders
has been reached. On the [ ] tab, change [File Numbering] to [Auto Reset]
(= 143), or format the memory card (= 142).
Setting Menu
Accessories
Lens Error
●● This error may occur if the lens is held while it is moving, or when the camera is
used in dusty or sandy locations.
●● Frequent display of this error message may indicate camera damage. In this
case, contact a Canon Customer Support Help Desk.
Appendix
Index
A camera error was detected (error number)
●● If this error message is displayed immediately after a shot, the image may not
have been saved. Switch to Playback mode to check for the image.
●● Frequent display of this error message may indicate camera damage. In this
case, write down the error number (Exx) and contact a Canon Customer Support
Help Desk.
164
File Error
●● Correct printing (= 153) may not be possible for photos from other cameras or
images that have been altered using computer software, even if the camera is
connected to the printer.
Print error
●● Check the paper size setting (= 155). If this error message is displayed when the
setting is correct, restart the printer and complete the setting on the camera again.
Ink absorber full
●● Contact a Canon Customer Support Help Desk to request assistance with ink
absorber replacement.
Wi-Fi
Connection failed
●● No access points were recognized. Check the access point settings (= 120).
●● A device could not be found. Turn the camera off and on again, and retry the
connection.
●● Check the device you want to connect to and make sure it is ready for connection.
Cannot determine access point
Sending failed
Memory card error
●● If the same error message is displayed even when you have inserted a formatted
memory card facing the correct way, contact a Canon Customer Support Help Desk.
Basic Guide
Receiving failed
Insufficient space on card
Advanced Guide
●● There is not enough free space on the memory card in the target camera to
receive images. Erase images to create space on the memory card, or insert a
memory card with sufficient space.
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Receiving failed
Memory card locked
Other Shooting Modes
●● The write-protect switch of the memory card in the camera to receive the images
is set to the locked position. Slide the write-protect switch to the unlocked position.
P Mode
Receiving failed
Naming error!
Tv, Av, and M Mode
●● When the highest folder number (999), and the highest image number (9999)
have been reached on the receiving camera, images cannot be received.
Playback Mode
Insufficient space on server
●● The WPS buttons on numerous access points were pressed simultaneously. Try
reconnecting again.
●● Delete unnecessary images uploaded to CANON iMAGE GATEWAY to
create space.
●● Save the images sent via Image Sync (= 133) to your computer.
No access points found
Check network settings
●● Check to make sure that the access point is turned on.
●● When connecting to an access point manually, make sure that you entered the
correct SSID.
Before Use
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
●● Check to make sure your computer can connect to the Internet with the current
network settings.
Accessories
Appendix
Incorrect password/Incorrect Wi-Fi security settings
●● Check the access point security settings (= 120).
IP address conflict
Index
●● Reset the IP address so that it does not conflict with another.
Disconnected/Receiving failed/Sending failed
●● You may be in an environment where Wi-Fi signals are obstructed.
●● Avoid using the camera’s Wi-Fi function around microwave ovens, Bluetooth
devices, and other devices that operate on the 2.4 GHz band.
●● Bring the camera closer to the other device you are trying to connect to (such as
the access point), and make sure there are no objects between the devices.
●● Check the connected device to make sure it is not experiencing errors.
165
On-Screen Information
Shooting (Information Display)
(29)
(12)(13)(14) (15)(16)
(28)
(17) (18)
(19)
(1)
(2)
(3)
( )
(5) 4
(6)
(7)
(8)
(9)
(10)
(11)
(20)
(31) (32) (33) (34) (35)
(31) Wind filter (= 67)
(24) Aperture value (= 85, = 85)
(32) Time zone (= 140)
(25) Exposure level (= 85)
(33) Image stabilization (= 83)
(26) ISO speed (= 72)
(34)
Auto level (= 52)
(27) Grid lines (= 51)
(35)
Auto slow shutter (= 67)
(28) Hybrid Auto mode (= 34)
(36) MF indicator (= 75)
(29) Zoom bar (= 32)
(37) Exposure compensation level
(= 71)
(30)
Auto (= 40)
* In [
] mode, indicates the number of shots available.
Shooting mode (= 168), Scene
icon (= 36)
(2)
Flash mode (= 81)
(3)
Flash exposure compensation /
Flash output level (= 82,
= 86)
(4)
Metering method (= 71)
(5)
Eco mode (= 141)
(6)
Drive mode (= 80)
(7)
Mercury lamp correction (= 50)
(8)
White balance (= 73)
(9)
Self-timer (= 42)
(10) My Colors (= 74)
(11) Camera shake warning (= 35)
(12) IS mode icon (= 37)
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Details
Sufficient charge
Playback Mode
Slightly depleted, but sufficient
(25) (26) (27)
(37)
Basic Guide
An on-screen icon or message indicates the battery charge level.
Display
(24)
Before Use
Battery Level
(21)
(22) (23)
(1)
(30)
(23) Shutter speed (= 84, = 85)
(36)
(13) Battery level (= 166)
(14) Still image compression (= 83),
Resolution (= 49)
(Blinking red)
[Charge the battery]
Nearly depleted. Charge the battery pack
soon.
Depleted. Charge the battery pack
immediately.
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
(15) Recordable shots (= 179)*
(16) Movie quality (= 50)
(17) Remaining time (= 179)
(18) Digital zoom magnification
(= 38), Digital tele-converter
(= 77)
Appendix
Index
(19) Focus range (= 75, = 75),
AF lock (= 80)
(20) AF frame (= 77), Spot AE point
frame (= 71)
(21) i-Contrast (= 72)
(22) AE lock (= 71), FE lock
(= 82)
166
(28) Still images: Resolution (= 179)
Movies: Playback time (= 179)
Playback (Detailed Information Display)
(2) (3)
(12)
(13)
(14)
(17) (18) (19) (20)
(23)
(25) (27)
(24)
(1)
Movies (= 32, = 87)
(2)
Current image no. / Total no. of
images
(15)
(16)
(21) (22)
(28)
(29)
(26)
(16) ISO speed (= 72)
(17) Metering method (= 71)
(3)
Histogram (= 89)
(4)
Battery level (= 166)
(19) White balance (= 73)
(5)
Wi-Fi signal strength (= 132)
(20) Mercury lamp correction (= 50)
(6)
Image Sync (= 133)
(7)
Image editing (= 102), Movie
compression (= 106)
(21) My Colors (= 74, = 103),
Creative Shot effect (= 57)
(8)
Favorites (= 101)
(9)
Protection (= 96)
(11) Shooting date/time (= 20)
(12) Shooting mode (= 168)
(13) Shutter speed (= 84, = 85)
(14) Aperture value (= 85, = 85)
(15) Exposure compensation level
(= 71)
●● Some information may not be displayed when viewing images on
a TV (= 148).
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Summary of Movie Control Panel
(18) Flash (= 81), Flash exposure
compensation (= 82)
(10) Folder number - File number
(= 143)
Before Use
Basic Guide
(4) (5)(6)(7)(8)(9) (10) (11)
(1)
(29) File size
(22) Focus range (= 75, = 75)
(23) Red-eye correction (= 104),
Short clip playback effect
(= 68)
(24) i-Contrast (= 72)
(25) Image quality / Frame rate
(movies) (= 49, = 50)
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
The following operations are available on the movie control panel,
accessed as described in “Viewing” (= 87).
Other Shooting Modes
Playback
Slow Motion (To adjust the playback speed, press the [ ][ ]
buttons or turn the [ ] dial. No sound is played.)
P Mode
Skip Backward* or Previous Clip (= 107) (To continue skipping
backward, keep holding down the [ ] button.)
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Previous Frame (For fast-rewind, keep holding down the [
button.)
Playback Mode
Next Frame (For fast-forward, keep holding down the [
]
Wi-Fi Functions
] button.)
Skip Forward* or Next Clip (= 107) (To continue skipping
forward, keep holding down the [ ] button.)
Setting Menu
Erase Clip (displayed when a digest movie is selected, = 107)
Accessories
Edit (= 105)
Shown when the camera is connected to a PictBridge-compatible
printer (= 153).
Appendix
Index
* Displays the frame approx. 4 sec. before or after the current frame.
●● During movie playback, you can skip back or forward (or to the
previous or next clip) by pressing the [ ][ ] buttons.
(26) Group playback (= 92)
(27) Compression (image quality)
(= 83) / Resolution (= 49,
= 50), Digest movies, (= 34),
MP4 (movies), Albums (= 108)
167
Before Use
Functions and Menu Tables
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Functions Available in Each Shooting Mode
Camera Basics
Shooting Mode
Function
Exposure Compensation (= 71)
Self-Timer (= 42)
/ /
Self-Timer Settings (= 43)
Delay*1
Shots*2
Flash (= 81)
Aperture Value (= 85)
Shutter Speed (= 85)
Program Shift (= 71)
AE Lock (= 71) / FE Lock (= 82)*5
AE Lock (Movie) / Exposure Shift (= 66)
Focus Range (= 75, = 75, = 80)
/
Tracking AF (= 78)
Change Display (= 27)
*1
*2
*3
*4
–
O
O
O
O
–
–
–
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
–
O
–
–
–
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
–
O
O
O
–
O
O
O
O
–
–
–
–
–
–
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
–
O
–
O
–
–
O
–
O
O
O
–
–
–
–
O
O
O
O
–
–
O
–
O
–
O
O
–
*3
O
–
–
–
–
–
*3
O
–
–
–
–
–
O
–
–
O
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
O
–
–
–
–
–
O
O
–
O
–
–
–
–
–
O
O
–
O
–
–
–
–
–
O
O
–
O
–
–
–
–
–
O
O
–
O
–
–
–
–
–
O
O
*4
O
–
O
O
O
O
–
–
–
–
–
O
–
*4
O
–
O
O
O
O
–
–
O
O
–
*3
O
–
–
–
–
–
O
–
–
O
–
–
–
–
–
O
O
–
O
–
–
–
–
–
O
O
–
O
–
–
–
–
–
O
O
–
O
–
–
–
–
–
O
O
–
O
–
–
–
–
–
O
O
–
O
–
–
–
–
–
O
O
–
O
–
–
–
–
–
O
O
–
O
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
O
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
O
–
–
–
–
O
–
–
–
O
–
–
–
–
O
–
–
–
O
–
–
–
–
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
–
–
O
O
–
–
O
O
–
–
–
O
–
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
–
–
–
O
–
–
–
O
–
–
–
O
O
–
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
–
–
O
O
–
–
O
O
–
–
O
O
–
–
O
O
O
–
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
–
–
O
O
O
–
O
O
O
–
–
O
O
–
O
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Playback Mode
Cannot be set to 0 seconds in modes without selection of the number of shots.
One shot (cannot be modified) in modes without selection of the number of shots.
Not available but switches to [ ] in some cases.
To maintain correct exposure, the ISO speed may be changed in addition to
the aperture value or shutter speed.
*5 FE lock not available in [ ] flash mode.
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
O Can be selected or automatically set. – Cannot be selected.
168
Before Use
FUNC. Menu
Basic Guide
Shooting Mode
Function
Metering Method (= 71)
Advanced Guide
/
My Colors (= 74)
/ / *1 / *1 /
*2
White Balance (= 73)
/
/
/
/
/
/
/ / / /
ISO Speed (= 72)
AUTO
80 / 100 / 200 / 400 / 800 / 1600 / 3200
Flash Exposure Compensation (= 82)
Flash Output Level (= 86)
Drive Mode (= 80)
*3
Still Image Aspect Ratio (= 49)
/
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
–
–
–
–
–
–
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
O
–
O
–
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
–
O
–
–
–
O
–
–
–
O
–
–
–
O
–
–
–
O
–
–
–
O
–
–
–
O
–
O
O
O
–
O
O
O
–
O
O
O
–
O
O
O
–
–
–
O
–
–
–
O
O
O
–
O
–
–
–
O
–
–
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
–
–
O
–
–
–
O
–
O
O
O
O
–
–
O
–
O
O
O
O
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
–
O
O
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
–
–
–
O
–
–
–
O
–
–
–
O
–
–
–
O
–
–
–
O
–
–
–
O
–
–
–
O
–
–
–
O
–
–
–
O
–
–
–
O
–
–
–
O
–
–
–
O
–
–
–
O
–
–
–
O
–
–
–
O
–
–
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
–
–
O
–
–
–
O
–
–
–
O
–
–
–
O
–
O
O
O
–
O
O
O
–
O
O
O
–
O
O
O
–
O
O
O
–
O
O
O
–
O
O
O
–
O
O
O
–
O
O
O
–
–
–
O
–
–
–
O
–
–
–
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
–
–
O
–
–
–
O
–
–
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
–
–
O
–
–
–
O
–
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
*4
–
O
–
–
–
O
–
–
–
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
*1 White balance is not available.
*2 Set in a range of 1 – 5: contrast, sharpness, color saturation, red, green,
blue, and skin tone.
], AF lock, or [ ].
*3[ ] is set with [
*4 Set automatically to suit the aspect ratio of the movie recording size.
*4
–
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
O Can be selected or automatically set. – Cannot be selected.
169
Before Use
Shooting Mode
Function
Resolution (= 49)
/
/
Compression (= 83)
Movie Quality (= 50)
Basic Guide
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
–
O
–
O
O
O
–
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
–
–
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
O
O
–
O
O
O
–
O
O
O
–
O
O
O
–
O
–
–
–
O
O
O
–
O
O
O
–
–
O
–
–
O
O
O
–
O
O
O
–
O
O
O
–
O
O
O
–
O
O
O
–
O
O
O
–
O
O
O
–
O
O
O
–
–
–
O
O
O
–
O
O
O
–
O
O
O
–
O
O
O
–
O
O
O
–
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
–
–
O
–
–
O
–
–
*1 Synchronizes with the aspect ratio setting and is automatically set (= 61).
*
*1
1
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
O Can be selected or automatically set. – Cannot be selected.
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
170
Before Use
Shooting Tab
Basic Guide
Shooting Mode
Function
AF Frame (= 77)
Face AiAF*1
Tracking AF
Center
AF Frame Size (= 77)*2
Normal
Small
Digital Zoom (= 38)
Standard
Off*3
Lock
1.6x / 2.0x
AF-Point Zoom (= 51)
On
Off
Servo AF (= 79)
On
Off
Continuous AF (= 79)
On
Off
Advanced Guide
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
–
–
O
–
–
O
–
–
–
O
O
O
O
O
O
–
–
O
–
–
O
–
–
O
–
–
O
O
O
–
–
O
–
–
–
O
–
O
O
–
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
–
–
O
O
–
O
O
–
O
O
–
O
Camera Basics
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
O
O
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
O
O
O
–
–
–
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
–
–
O
O
O
O
O
O
Other Shooting Modes
O
O
–
O
O
O
–
O
O
O
–
O
O
O
–
O
O
O
–
O
O
O
–
–
O
O
–
–
–
O
–
–
O
O
–
–
O
O
–
–
O
O
–
–
O
O
–
–
O
O
–
–
–
–
O
–
–
O
–
–
–
O
–
–
–
O
–
–
–
O
–
–
–
O
–
–
–
O
–
–
–
O
–
–
–
O
–
–
O
O
–
–
O
O
–
–
–
O
–
–
O
O
–
–
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
–
O
O
O
O
O
–
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
–
O
O
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
–
O
–
*4
–
O
O
–
O
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
O
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
O
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
O
–
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
–
O
O
–
O
–
O
–
*1 Operation when no faces are detected varies by shooting mode.
*2 Available when the AF frame is set to [Center].
*3 Digital zoom is canceled when you switch to a shooting mode which does not
support digital zoom.
*4 [On] when subject movement is detected.
O Can be selected or automatically set. – Cannot be selected.
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
171
Before Use
Shooting Mode
Function
AF-assist Beam (= 53)
On
Off
MF-Point Zoom (= 75)
Off
2x / 4x
Safety MF (= 75)
On
Off
MF Peaking Settings (= 76)
On
Peaking
Off
High
Level
Low
Color
Red / Blue / Yellow
Flash Settings (= 54, = 82, = 86)
Auto
Flash Mode
Manual
Red-Eye Lamp
On / Off
Flash Exp. Comp
Flash Output
On
Safety FE
Off
i-Contrast (= 72)
Auto
Off
Hg Lamp Corr. (= 50)
On
Off
Basic Guide
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
–
O
O
O
O
–
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
–
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
O
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
O
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
O
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
–
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
–
O
–
–
–
–
O
–
–
–
–
O
–
–
–
–
O
–
–
–
O
O
O
O
O
–
O
–
–
–
–
O
–
–
–
–
O
–
–
–
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
–
O
–
–
–
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
– O O O O O O O – O O O O O O
–
–
–
– – – – – – – –
O O O –
O O O O O O O O – O O O O O O
See “Flash Exposure Compensation” in “FUNC. Menu” (= 169).
See “Flash Output Level” in “FUNC. Menu” (= 169).
– O O O O O O O – O O O O O O
–
–
– – – – – – – –
O O O O O
O
–
O
O
–
O
O
–
O
O
–
O
O
–
O
O
–
O
O
–
O
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
–
O
O
–
O
–
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
O
–
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
O
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
Appendix
Index
O Can be selected or automatically set. – Cannot be selected.
172
Before Use
Shooting Mode
Function
Safety Shift (= 85)
On
Off
Wind Filter (= 67)
Auto
Off
Attenuator (= 67)
Off / On
Auto
Review image after shooting (= 54)
Off / Quick
Display Time
2 sec. / 4 sec. / 8 sec. / Hold
Off
Display Info
Detailed
Grid Lines (= 51)
On / Off
IS Settings (= 83)
Off
Continuous
IS Mode
Shoot Only
Low
Standard
Dynamic IS
High
Basic Guide
–
O
O
O
O
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
–
O
–
O
–
–
O
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
–
O
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
O
–
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
O
O
–
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
–
O
O
–
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
–
O
O
O
O
O
–
O
O
O
O
O
–
O
O
O
O
O
–
O
O
O
O
O
–
O
O
–
O
O
–
O
O
–
O
O
–
O
O
–
O
–
–
O
O
O
O
O
–
O
O
O
O
O
–
O
O
O
O
O
–
O
O
O
O
O
–
O
O
O
O
O
–
–
O
–
–
O
–
O
O
O
O
O
–
O
O
O
O
O
–
O
O
O
O
–
–
O
O
O
O
O
–
O
O
O
O
O
–
O
O
O
O
O
–
O
O
O
O
O
–
O
O
O
O
O
–
O
O
O
O
O
–
O
O
–
O
O
O
O
O
–
O
–
–
O
O
–
O
O
O
O Can be selected or automatically set. – Cannot be selected.
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
173
Before Use
Shooting Mode
Function
Auto Level (= 52)
Enable
Disable
Display Area (= 39)
Large / Medium / Small
Auto Settings (= 40, = 41)
On
Seek Assist
Off
Face / Upper Body /
Whole Body / Manual /
Auto Zoom
Auto
Off
Digest Type (= 34)
Include Stills / No Stills
Auto slow shutter (= 67)
Enable
Disable
Face ID Settings (= 45)
On
Off
Basic Guide
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
–
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
–
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
–
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
–
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
–
O
–
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
–
O
O
O
–
O
O
O
–
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
–
–
O
O
O
O
O
–
O
–
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
–
–
–
–
–
O
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
–
O
O
O
–
O
–
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
–
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M Mode
- Names of people in shots taken using Face ID (= 44) may not be
displayed in some modes or with some settings, but they will be recorded
in the still images.
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
O Can be selected or automatically set. – Cannot be selected.
Appendix
Index
174
Set Up Tab
Before Use
Playback Tab
Item
Reference Page
Item
Reference Page
Mute
= 139
Play Creative Shot Movies
= 89
Volume
= 139
Short Clip Mix
= 111
Hints & Tips
= 140
Album Playback
= 108
Date/Time
= 140
List/Play Digest Movies
= 90
Time Zone
= 140
Slideshow
= 94
Lens Retraction
= 141
Erase
= 98
Eco Mode
= 141
Protect
= 96
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Power Saving
= 26, = 141
Rotate
= 100
Disp. Brightness
= 142
Favorites
= 101
Start-up Image
= 142
Photobook Set-up
= 158
Format
= 142
i-Contrast
= 104
File Numbering
= 143
Red-Eye Correction
= 104
Create Folder
= 144
Cropping
= 102
Setting Menu
Units
= 144
Resize
= 102
Accessories
Video System
= 148
My Colors
= 103
Wireless settings
= 112
Face ID Info
= 90
Certification Logo Display
= 144
Transition Effect
= 87
Language
= 144
Index Effect
= 91
Reset All
= 145
Scroll Display
= 87
Group Images
= 92
Auto Rotate
= 100
Resume
= 87
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Appendix
Index
175
Print Tab
Handling Precautions
Item
Print
Reference Page
–
●● The camera is a high-precision electronic device. Avoid dropping it or
subjecting it to strong impact.
Select Images & Qty.
= 157
Select Range
= 157
Select All Images
= 157
●● Never bring the camera near magnets, motors, or other devices that
generate strong electromagnetic fields. Electromagnetic fields may
cause malfunction or erase image data.
Clear All Selections
= 158
Print Settings
= 156
Playback Mode FUNC. Menu
Item
Reference Page
Rotate
= 100
Protect
= 96
Favorites
= 101
Print
= 153
Group Playback
= 92
Play Movie
= 87
Play Linked Digest Movie
= 90
Smart Shuffle
= 95
Image Search
= 91
Slideshow
= 94
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
●● If water droplets or dirt adheres to the camera or screen, wipe with a dry
soft cloth, such as an eyeglass cloth. Do not rub hard or apply force.
Other Shooting Modes
●● Never use cleaners containing organic solvents to clean the camera
or screen.
P Mode
●● Use a blower brush to remove dust from the lens. If cleaning is difficult,
contact a Canon Customer Support Help Desk.
Tv, Av, and M Mode
●● Condensation (water droplets) may form on the camera after sudden
temperature changes by transferring from cold to warm environments.
To prevent condensation from forming by transferring the camera from
cold to warm environments, put the camera in an airtight, resealable
plastic bag and let it gradually adjust to the temperature before
removing it from the bag.
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
●● If condensation does form on the camera, stop using it immediately.
Continuing to use the camera in this state may damage it. Remove
the battery pack and memory card, and wait until the moisture has
evaporated before resuming use.
●● Store unused battery packs in a plastic bag or other container. To
maintain battery performance if you will not use the battery pack for
some time, about once a year charge it and then use the camera until
it runs out of power before storing the battery pack.
Accessories
Appendix
Index
176
Specifications
Camera
Image Sensor
Camera Effective Pixels
(Image processing may cause a decrease
in the number of pixels.) .........................Approx. 20.3 megapixels
Total Pixels........................................Approx. 21.1 megapixels
Image Size.........................................1/2.3 type
Lens
Focal Length
(35mm film equivalent)...........................4.3 – 172 mm
(24 – 960 mm)
Zoom Magnification...........................40x
Digital zoom
Magnification.....................................Approx. 4x
Max. Magnification
(digital x optical zoom).......................Approx. 160x
Focal Length
(max. telephoto, 35mm film equivalent).....Equivalent to approx. 3840 mm
Screen (Monitor)
Type...................................................TFT color liquid crystal
Screen Size.......................................3.0 type
Effective Pixels..................................Approx. 922,000 dots
Continuous Shooting
Speed
Before Use
(Varies depending on the subject, zoom
position, and other shooting factors,
as well as memory card brands.) .............Normal Continuous Shooting
in Auto/P modes: Approx.
5.9 shots/sec.
Continuous Shooting AF in P
mode: Approx. 4.6 shots/sec.
Continuous Shooting LV in P
mode: Approx. 4.6 shots/sec.
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
Built-In Flash
Flash Range (Wide angle end)..........50 cm – 4.0 m (1.6 – 13 ft.)
Flash Range (Telephoto end)............2.0 m (6.6 ft.)
Shutter Speed
Auto Mode (automatic settings).........1 – 1/3200 sec.
Range in all shooting modes
Maximum.......................................15 sec.
Minimum........................................1/3200 sec.
Speed (unit: sec.)..............................Tv, M Modes
15, 13, 10, 8, 6, 5, 4, 3.2, 2.5, 2,
1.6, 1.3, 1, 0.8, 0.6, 0.5, 0.4, 0.3,
1/4, 1/5, 1/6, 1/8, 1/10, 1/13, 1/15,
1/20, 1/25, 1/30, 1/40, 1/50, 1/60,
1/80, 1/100, 1/125, 1/160, 1/200,
1/250, 1/320, 1/400, 1/500, 1/640,
1/800, 1/1000, 1/1250, 1/1600,
1/2000, 1/2500, 1/3200
Aperture
F number...........................................3.3 – 8.0 (W)
6.9 – 8.0 (T)
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
AF
AF frame............................................Face AiAF (number of AF frames:
max.9), Tracking AF, Center
File Format.............................................Design rule for Camera File
system (DCF) compliant; DPOF
(version 1.1) compatible
177
Data Type (Still Images)
Image File Format.............................Exif 2.3 (DCF 2.0)
Image Type........................................JPEG
Data Type (Movies)
Recording Format..............................MP4
Video..................................................MPEG-4 AVC/H.264
Audio.................................................MPEG-4 AAC-LC (stereo)
Power Supply
Battery Pack......................................NB-13L
Interface
Wired.................................................Hi-Speed USB (Micro)
HDMI (Type D)
Wireless.............................................Wi-Fi
Specifications: IEEE 802.11b/g/n
Frequency: 2.4 GHz
Channels: 1 – 11
Security: WEP, WPA-PSK (AES/
TKIP), WPA2-PSK (AES/TKIP)
NFC
Operating Environment
Temperature......................................0 – 40 °C (32 – 104 °F)
Dimensions (CIPA compliant)
(WxHxD)................................................109.7 x 63.8 x 35.7 mm
(4.32 x 2.51 x 1.41 in.)
Weight (CIPA compliant)
Including Battery Pack,
Memory Card.....................................Approx. 270 g (Approx. 9.52 oz.)
Camera Body Only............................Approx. 245 g (Approx. 8.64 oz.)
Number of Shots/Recording Time, Playback Time
Number of Still Image Shots (CIPA compliant)
Approx. 250 shots
Number of Still Image Shots (Eco Mode On)
Movie Recording Time (CIPA compliant)*1
Approx. 355 shots
Movie Recording Time (Continuous Shooting)*2
Approx. 1 hr. 25 min.
Playback Time*3
Approx. 5 hr.
Approx. 50 min.
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
*1 Total time when shooting repeatedly with the following conditions
] mode and defaults for other settings
-[
- Shooting/pausing, zooming, turning the camera on and off
*2Total time when shooting repeatedly with the following conditions
] mode and defaults for other settings
-[
- If the maximum amount of movie recording time or number of shots is reached,
the camera will shut down / restart.
*3Time when playing a still image slideshow.
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Shooting Range
Shooting
Mode
*
Focus
Range
–
Other
modes
Playback Mode
Maximum Wide Angle
( )
Maximum Telephoto
( )
1 cm (0.4 in.) – infinity
2.0 m (6.6 ft.) – infinity
5 cm (2.0 in.) – infinity
2.0 m (6.6 ft.) – infinity
Setting Menu
–
Accessories
1 – 50 cm
(0.4 in. – 1.6 ft.)
Wi-Fi Functions
Appendix
* Manual Focus is the same.
Index
178
Number of Shots per Memory Card
Recording Time per Memory Card
The number of shots at an aspect ratio (= 49) of 4:3 per memory card is
as follows. Note that the number of shots available varies by aspect ratio.
Number of Shots per 16 GB Memory Card (Approx. shots)
1766
2980
3546
5925
9344
16755
53992
80988
●● The values in the table are based on Canon measurement conditions
and may change depending on the subject, memory card and camera
settings.
Recording
Pixels
(1920 x 1080)
(1920 x 1080)
(1280 x 720)
(640 x 480)
Total Recording Time
per 16 GB Memory Card
(Approx.)
Recording Time for One
Time (Approx.)
59 min. 30 sec.
29 min. 59 sec.
1 hour 26 min. 5 sec.
29 min. 59 sec.
4 hours 5 min. 15 sec.
29 min. 59 sec.
10 hours 22 min. 35 sec.
1 hour
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
●● The values in the table are based on Canon measurement conditions
and may change depending on the subject, memory card and camera
settings.
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Playback Mode
●● Recording times for individual movies are based on memory cards
rated at an SD speed class of 10. Recording may stop when cards
rated at lower speed classes are used. Recording will also stop
automatically when the file size reaches 4 GB, or when the card
becomes full.
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
179
Battery Pack NB-13L
Type: Nominal Voltage: Nominal Capacity: Charging Cycles: Operating Temperatures: Rechargeable lithium-ion battery
3.6 V DC
1250 mAh
Approx. 300 times
0 – 40 °C (32 – 104 °F)
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Battery Charger CB-2LH/CB-2LHE
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Rated Input: 100 – 240 V AC (50/60 Hz)
0.09 A (100 V) – 0.06 A (240 V)
Rated Output: 4.2 V DC, 0.7 A
Charging Time: Approx. 2 hr. 10 min. (when using NB-13L)
Operating Temperatures: 5 – 40 °C (41 – 104 °F)
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Compact Power Adapter CA-DC30/CA-DC30E
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Rated Input: 100 – 240 V AC (50/60 Hz)
0.07 A (100 V) – 0.045 A (240 V)
Rated Output: 5.0 V DC, 0.55 A
Charging Time: Approx. 5 hr.* (when charged with NB-13L in
the camera)
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
* Charging time varies considerably depending on
the remaining battery level.
Setting Menu
Operating Temperatures: 5 – 40 °C (41 – 104 °F)
Accessories
●● The number of shots that can be taken is based on measurement
guidelines of the Camera & Imaging Products Association (CIPA).
●● Under some shooting conditions, the number of shots and recording
time may be less than mentioned above.
Appendix
Index
●● Number of shots/time with a fully charged battery pack.
180
Index
A
Accessories 147
AE lock 71
AF frames 77
AF lock 80
Aspect ratio 49
AUTO mode (shooting mode) 22, 32
Av (shooting mode) 85
B
Batteries → Date/time (date/time
battery)
Battery pack
Charging 18
Eco mode 141
Level 166
Power saving 26
Black and white images 74
C
Camera
Reset all 145
Camera access point mode 118
Camera connect 113
CameraWindow 151
CANON iMAGE GATEWAY 124
Center (AF frame mode) 77
Clock 31
Color (white balance) 73
Compression ratio (image quality) 83
Continuous shooting 37, 43
Creative shot 57
Custom white balance 73
D
Date/time
Changing 20
Date/time battery 21
Settings 20
World clock 140
Defaults → Reset all
Digital tele-converter 77
Digital zoom 38
Display language 21
DPOF 156
E
Eco mode 141
Editing
i-Contrast 104
My colors 103
Red-eye correction 104
Editing or erasing connection
information 137
Erasing 98
Error messages 164
Exposure
AE lock 71
Compensation 71
FE lock 82
F
Face ID 44
Face self-timer (shooting mode) 65
Favorites 101
FE lock 82
File numbering 143
Fireworks (shooting mode) 59
Fish-eye effect (shooting mode) 60
Flash
Deactivating flash 81
Flash exposure compensation 82
On 81
Slow synchro 81
Focusing
AF frames 77
AF lock 80
AF-point zoom 51
MF peaking 76
Servo AF 79
Focus lock 77
Focus range
Macro 75
Manual focus 75
Framing assist 39
FUNC. menu
Basic operations 28
Table 169
G
Geotagging images 135
GPS information display 89
Grid lines 51
H
Handheld nightscene (shooting mode)
59
HDMI cable 148
I
i-Contrast 72, 104
iFrame movies (movie mode) 69
Image quality → Compression ratio
(image quality)
Images
Display period 54
Erasing 98
Playback → Viewing
Protecting 96
Image stabilization 83
Image sync 133
Indicator 31
ISO speed 72
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
L
Other Shooting Modes
Lamp 53, 54
Live view control (shooting mode) 56
Low light (shooting mode) 59
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M Mode
M
M (shooting mode) 85
Macro (focus range) 75
Magnified display 94
Manual focus (focus range) 75
Memory cards 2
Recording time 179
Menu
Basic operations 29
Table 168
Mercury lamp correction 50
Metering method 71
Miniature effect (shooting mode) 61
Monochrome (shooting mode) 63
Movies
Editing 105
Recording time 179
Multi-area white balance 50
My colors 74, 103
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
P
P (shooting mode) 70
Package contents 2
181
Photobook set-up 158
Playback → Viewing
Portrait (shooting mode) 59
Poster effect (shooting mode) 60
Power 147 → Battery charger,
→ Battery pack
Power saving 26
Printing 153 → Printing
Program AE 70
Protecting 96
R
Recording pixels (image size) 49
Red-eye correction 104
Remote shooting 136
Reset all 145
Resizing images 102
Rotating 100
S
Saving images to a computer 151
Screen
Display language 21
Icons 166, 167
Menu → FUNC. menu, Menu
SD/SDHC/SDXC memory cards
→ Memory cards
Searching 91
Self-timer 42
2-second self-timer 42
Wink self-timer (shooting mode)
64
Sending images 129
Sending images to another camera
129
Sending images to a smartphone 113
Sending images to Web services 124
Sepia tone images 74
Servo AF 79
Shooting
Shooting date/time → Date/time
Shooting information 166
Short clips (movie mode) 68
Slideshow 94
Smart shuffle 95
Smart shutter (shooting mode) 63
Smile (shooting mode) 63
Soft focus (shooting mode) 62
Software
Installation 119, 151
Saving images to a computer
151
Sounds 139
Standard (movie mode) 66
Story highlights 108
Strap 2, 17
Super vivid (shooting mode) 60
TV display 148
W
White balance (color) 73
Wi-Fi functions 112
Wi-Fi menu 116
Wind filter 67
World clock 140
Wrist strap → Strap
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Z
Other Shooting Modes
Zoom 22, 33, 38
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
T
Terminal 153
Toy camera effect (shooting mode)
62
Tracking AF 78
Traveling with the camera 140
Troubleshooting 160
TV display 148
Tv (shooting mode) 84
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
V
Viewing 23
Image search 91
Index display 91
Magnified display 94
Single-image display 23
Slideshow 94
Smart shuffle 95
182
Wi-Fi (Wireless LAN) Precautions
●● Countries and Regions Permitting WLAN Use
-- Use of WLAN is restricted in some countries and regions, and illegal
use may be punishable under national or local regulations. To avoid
violating WLAN regulations, visit the Canon website to check where
use is allowed.
Note that Canon cannot be held liable for any problems arising from
use in other countries and regions.
●● Doing any of the following may incur legal penalties:
-- Altering or modifying the product
-- Removing the certification labels from the product
●● According to foreign exchange and foreign trade law regulations,
export permission (or service transaction permission) from the
Japanese government is necessary to export strategic resources or
services (including this product) outside Japan.
●● Because this product includes American encryption software, it falls
under U.S. Export Administration Regulations, and cannot be exported
to or brought into a country under U.S. trade embargo.
●● Be sure to make notes of the wireless LAN settings you use.
The wireless LAN settings saved to this product may change or be
erased due to incorrect operation of the product, the effects of radio
waves or static electricity, or accident or malfunction. Be sure to make
notes of wireless LAN settings as a precaution. Please note that
Canon accepts no responsibility for direct or indirect damages or loss
of earnings resulting from a degradation or disappearance of content.
●● When transferring this product to another person, disposing of it, or
sending it for repair, be sure to note the wireless LAN settings and
reset the product to its default settings (erase settings) if necessary.
●● Be sure to use the product as directed in this guide.
Be sure to use the wireless LAN function of this product within the
guidelines noted in this guide. Canon accepts no responsibility for
damages or loss if the function and product are used in ways other
than as described in this guide.
●● Do not use the wireless LAN function of this product near medical
equipment or other electronic equipment.
Use of the wireless LAN function near medical equipment or other
electronic equipment may affect operation of those devices.
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Radio Wave Interference Precautions
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
●● This product may receive interference from other devices that emit
radio waves. To avoid interference, be sure to use this product as far
away as possible from such devices, or avoid using the devices at the
same time as this product.
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Playback Mode
Security Precautions
Wi-Fi Functions
Because Wi-Fi uses radio waves to transmit signals, security precautions
more stringent than when using a LAN cable are required.
Keep the following points in mind when using Wi-Fi.
●● The product uses only authorized networks searches for Wi-Fi
networks in the vicinity and displays the results on the screen.
Networks you are not authorized to use (unknown networks) may
also be displayed. However, attempting to connect to or using such
networks could be regarded as unauthorized access. Be sure to
use only networks you are authorized to use, and do not attempt to
connect to other unknown networks.
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
●● Canon will not make compensation for damages resulting from loss or
theft of the product.
Canon accepts no responsibility for damages or loss resulting from
unauthorized access or use of target devices registered on this
product due to loss or theft of the product.
183
If security settings have not been properly set, the following problems may
occur.
●● Transmission monitoring
Third parties with malicious intent may monitor Wi-Fi transmissions
and attempt to acquire the data you are sending.
●● Unauthorized network access
Third parties with malicious intent may gain unauthorized access to
the network you are using to steal, modify, or destroy information.
Additionally, you could fall victim to other types of unauthorized access
such as impersonation (where someone assumes an identity to gain
access to unauthorized information) or springboard attacks (where
someone gains unauthorized access to your network as a springboard
to cover their tracks when infiltrating other systems).
To prevent these types of problems from occurring, be sure to thoroughly
secure your Wi-Fi network.
Only use this camera’s Wi-Fi function with a proper understanding of
Wi-Fi security, and balance risk and convenience when adjusting security
settings.
The camera can print to PictBridge-compatible printers
via Wi-Fi. PictBridge technical standards make it easy
to connect digital cameras, printers, and other devices
directly. Additionally, a new standard called DPS
over IP enables PictBridge connections in network
environments, and the camera is also compatible with
this standard.
Trademarks and Licensing
Before Use
●● Microsoft and Windows are trademarks or registered trademarks of
Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.
Basic Guide
●● Macintosh and Mac OS are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the
U.S. and other countries.
Advanced Guide
●● App Store, iPhone, and iPad are trademarks of Apple Inc.
Camera Basics
●● The SDXC logo is a trademark of SD-3C, LLC.
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
●● HDMI, the HDMI logo and High-Definition Multimedia Interface are
trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing, LLC.
●● The iFrame logo and the iFrame symbol are trademarks of Apple Inc.
Other Shooting Modes
●● Wi-Fi , Wi-Fi Alliance , WPA™, WPA2™ and Wi-Fi Protected Setup™
are trademarks or registered trademarks of the Wi-Fi Alliance.
P Mode
●● The N-Mark is a trademark or registered trademark of NFC Forum, Inc.
in the United States and in other countries.
Tv, Av, and M Mode
●● All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners.
Playback Mode
®
®
●● This device incorporates exFAT technology licensed from Microsoft.
Wi-Fi Functions
●● This product is licensed under AT&T patents for the MPEG-4 standard
and may be used for encoding MPEG-4 compliant video and/or
decoding MPEG-4 compliant video that was encoded only (1) for
a personal and non-commercial purpose or (2) by a video provider
licensed under the AT&T patents to provide MPEG-4 compliant
video. No license is granted or implied for any other use for MPEG-4
standard.
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
184
Disclaimer
●● Unauthorized reproduction of this guide is prohibited.
●● All measurements based on Canon testing standards.
●● Information subject to change without notice, as are product
specifications and appearance.
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
●● Illustrations and screenshots in this guide may differ slightly from the
actual equipment.
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
●● The above items notwithstanding, Canon cannot be held liable for any
loss arising from the use of this product.
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
185
">